Cadet Hand Book Panaji PDF

CADET’S HANDBOOK
FOR JD/JW NAVAL WING NCC CADETS
************* NCC logo
1 GOA NU NCC, PANAJI

FOREWORD
1. During my last three years in the NCC, I have noticed that most of
the cadets don’t possess a personal copy of the Cadet’s Handbook
and it is an accepted behavior norm to Photostat the notes / study
material before the exams. This proves to be a costly and time
wasting process that is easily avoidable. Upon enquiring many JD /
JW cadets replied that they were unable to understand many
chapters because those Handbooks were meant for SD / SW
cadets and were pitched at the higher understanding level of
college students.
2. With the revision of the NCC syllabus in the year 2006, the problem
was further compounded because even the ANOs found it difficult
to assimilate the correct teaching material since several new topics
were introduced in the new syllabus.
3. The need to either adapt or perish was the driving force that lead to
this Handbook being conceived. This Handbook, is meant
especially for JD / JW Naval Wing NCC cadets and it is envisaged
that it will continue to provide useful information to the cadets even
after they finish their NCC training. The book although covers the
entire NCC syllabus but is meant to be neither course nor exam
specific.
4. It would give me extreme happiness if this book is referred to time

and again by the cadets and the ANOs. I am confident that this
small initiative by 1 Goa NU NCC would benefit all JD / JW cadets
across the length and breadth of the country. The ANOs / Cadets
can post any queries / inputs for my personal attention at
[email protected]
5. I would like to convey heartfelt gratitude to Gp Cdr. Gp HQ

(Belgaum) and DDG, Dte (Kar and Goa) for their encouragement
and deep interest shown to improve the level of training being
imparted to the cadets.
Date: 25 Mar 08
Place: Goa
(Pradeep Paul)
Commander
Commanding Officer
1 Goa NU NCC, Panaji
PREFACE
1. It gives me immense pleasure in releasing this Handbook for the

Naval Wing NCC Cadets of JD and JW.
2. The NCC syllabus was amended in the year 2006. A need which
was actually felt since the, has been fulfilled by releasing this
handbook, which would be very useful to the ANOs and Cadets
in their day to day training activities.
3. I take this opportunity to congratulate all personnel, who have

put in their best efforts in collecting the inputs as required to
bring out this Handbook.
4. This Handbook is not the end all of information. With rapid

changes in the technical environment, the necessity to upgrade
and update would need to parallelly go on.
Date: 05 Apr 08
Place: Bangalore
(P Rajesh Rao)
Air Commodore
DDG NCC (Kar and Goa)
This book is meant for training NCC cadets and has been
compiled from unclassified information. Unauthorized
copying/using for commercial purposes is prohibited. All rights
reserved by the publisher. For inquiries contact
[email protected] or mail at:-
M/S Ambika Offset

15/298, Charcoo Gate
Ghatia, Agra
Uttar Pradesh
PIN – 282002
First Edition – May 2008

Price Rs 75/=
INDEX
Sec Topic Page No
Chapter I – National Cadet Corps
1 Aims, Objectives and Organization of NCC 1

2 Philosophy of Training 4
3 NCC Song 6
Chapter II – National Integration
1 Indian Culture and Its Heritage 7

2 Indian Religion 9
3 Customs and Traditions of India 11
4 Unity in Diversity 14
5 Importance of National Integration 14
6 Famous Leaders of India 16
7 India and its Neighbors 24
8 Contribution of Youth in Nation Building 29
Chapter III – Drill
1 General and Words of Command 31

2 Attention, Stand at Ease and Stand Easy, 32
Turning and Inclining at the Halt
3 Sizing, Forming up in Three Ranks and 33
Numbering, Open and Close Order March
and Dressing
4 Saluting at the Halt, Getting on Parade, 36
Dismissing and Falling Out
5 Marching Speed, Length of Pace, Marching 37
in Double / Quick / Slow and Halt
6 Turning on the March and Wheeling 39
7 Saluting on March 43
Sec Topic Page No
Chapter IV – Weapon Training
1 Characteristics of a Rifle / Rifle Ammunition 44

and its Fire Power
2 Stripping, Assembling, Care, Cleaning and 45
Sight Setting of .22 Rifle
3 Loading, Cocking and Unloading of .22 48
Rifle
4 Lying Position and Holding 49
5 Aiming, Range and Targets 51
6 Trigger Control and Firing a Shot 53
7 Range Procedure and Safety Precautions 56
Chapter V – Leadership
1 Motivation, Discipline, Duties of a good 59

citizen, Leadership traits
2 Personality / Character Development 62
Chapter VI – Civil Affairs
1 Civil Defence Organization and its Duties 64

2 Types of Emergencies 66
3 Protection 67
4 Essential Services and their Maintenance 68
5 Disaster Management 70
Chapter VII – Social Service
1 Weaker Sections of Our Society and Their 74

Needs
2 Basics of Social Service and its Need 75
3 NGOs and Their contribution to Society 76
4 Contribution of Youth Towards Social 78
Welfare
5 Family Planning 80
6 HIV – Causes and Prevention 82
7 Cancer – Causes and Prevention 84
Sec Topic Page No
Chapter VIII – Health and Hygiene
1 Structure and Functioning of the Human 86

Body
2 Hygiene and Sanitation 89
3 Preventable Diseases 92
4 First Aid in Common Medical Emergencies 93
5 Dressing of Wounds 95
6 Yoga – Introduction 99
Chapter IX – Environment and Ecology
1 What is Environment? 100

2 What is Ecology? 101
3 Conservation of Environment and Ecology 103
4 Pollution and its control 105
Chapter X – Self Defence
1 Precautions and General Behavior of Boy 107

Cadets
2 Prevention of Untoward Incidents 108
3 Vulnerable Parts of the Body 109
4 Physical Self Defence 110
Chapter XI – Adventure Activities 112

Sec Topic Page No
Chapter XII – Naval Orientation
1 History of the Indian Navy 113

2 Main Parts of a Ship 114
3 Naval Terms 120
4 Types of Warships and Role 123
5 Naval Customs and Traditions 127
6 Naval Shore Establishments and Naval 132
Organization
7 Organization on Board a Ship 135
8 Naval Armament (Ship / S/ M / Aircraft) 138
9 Ranks of Officers and Sailors 139
10 Introduction to Naval Aviation 141
11 Introduction to Submarines 144
12 Merchant Navy and its Role 148
13 Replenishment at Sea 150
14 Organization of Indian Army 153
15 Organization of Indian Air Force 156
Chapter XIII – Seamanship
1 Rigging – Cordage & Wire Ropes, Rope 158

Work Terms
2 Bends and Hitches – Reef Knot, Half Hitch, 163
Clove Hitch, Rolling Hitch, Timber Hitch,
Bow line, Round Turn and Two Half Hitch
and Bow Line on the Bight
3 Tackles 166
4 Fundamentals of Steering 168
5 Boat Pulling 171
6 Sailing 174
7 Anchor and Anchor Cable 180
8 Boatswain Call 185
Sec Topic Page No
Chapter XIV – Naval Communication
1 Semaphore 186
2 Simple Voice Procedures as used in Navy 187
3 Flag Signaling 189
4 Morse Code 189
5 Phonetic Alphabets 190
Chapter XV – Navigation
1 Navigation – Purpose and Common 191

Principles Used
2 Simple Chart Work 195
Chapter XVI – Winds, Tides & Curents 201
Chapter XVII – Ship and Boat Modeling
1 Principles of Ship Modeling 203

2 Reading a Drawing of Static Model 203
3 Tools and Materials Used in Ship Modeling 204
4 Care and Handling of Power Tools 205
5 Types of Joints used in Carpentry 206
6 Stabilizing of Models 207
7 Calculation of Sail Area of a Model 207
8 Fitting, Painting and Finishing of the Model 210
9 Introduction to Powered Ship Model 211
Sec Topic Page No
Chapter XVIII – Fire Fighting and Damage Control
1 Watertight and Gas tight Integrity 212

2 Fire Fighting 216
Chapter XIX – Suvival and Rescue
1 Modern Methods of Rescue and 222

Resuscitation
2 Life Saving Appliances onboard Ships 226
3 Distress Signals 230
Chapter XX – Anti Submarine Warrare
1 Elementary Theory of SONAR sets 231

2 Anti-Submarine Weapons like Torpedo, 232
Depth Charge, Squid and ASW Mortar,
Mines, Mine Laying and Sweeping, Missile
Launched Missiles
Chapter XXI – Gunnery 238
Chapter XXII – Famous Naval Operations 241
Appendix ‘A’ – NCC Naval Wing Training Syllabus 246
Appendix ‘P’ – Naval Officers and Sailors Rank 248

Insignia
CHAPTER I
NATIONAL CADET CORPS
SECTION 1
AIMS, OBJECTIVES AND ORGANIZATION OF NCC
Brief Historical Background
1. The National Cadet Corps (NCC) has its genesis in the ‘University
Corps’, which was created under the Defence Act, 1917 with the
object to make up the shortage of the Army. In 1920, when the
Indian Territorial Act was passed, it was replaced by the University
Training Corps (UTC). In 1942, this designation was changed to the
University Officers Training Corps (UOTC). The training under this
scheme was confined to a very small percentage of University
students.
2. After the Second World War, the need to widen the scope of this
great nation building activity was keenly felt. At the behest of the
first Prime Minister of India, Pandit JN Nehru, a committee under
the chairmanship of Dr HN Kunzru was set up in 1946, to consider
the question of entarging and expanding the organization, with the
aim of fitting it in with the requirements and aspirations of New
India. As a result of the recommendations of this Committee, an Act
of Parliament was passed in 1948 as “The National Cadet Corps
Act”. Under this Act the aims of the organization were reframed and
the whole system of imparting voluntary military training to students
was considerably altered.
3. Motto of NCC. The Motto of NCC is ‘Unity and discipline’ which
was adopted on 23 Dec 1957.
4. NCC Day. The fourth Sunday of November is celebrated as NCC
Day.
5. Aims of NCC. The Aims of NCC as approved by MOD in Mar 01
are-
(a) To develop character, comradeship, discipline, leadership,
secular outlook, spirit of adventure and the ideas of selfless
service amongst the youth of the country.
(b) To create a human resource of organized, trained and
motivated youth, to provide leadership in all walks of life
and always available for the service of the nation.
(c) To provide a suitable environment to motivate the youth to
take up a career in the Armed Forces.
4. NCC Flag. In 1954, the existing tricolor flag was introduced. Its
dimensions are 6 x 4 feet and it is divided into three equal parts
vertically depicting the three services of the Corps. The left part is
Red for Army, the middle part is Navy Blue for the Navy and the
light Blue for the Air Force. In the middle three is a laurel wreath
made up of two branches, having 8 bunches of 3 leaves each with
the stems of both branches tied as a knot, there are two dots like
colon in the middle of the area where the branches meet together.
The letter NCC appears in the centre. The 16 bunches represent 16
Directorates and two dots represent two schools, OTS and WOTS.
Organization of NCC
5 NCC functions under the Ministry of Defence. The Defence

Secretary is the overall-in-charge, who is responsible to the Govt.
of India for efficient functioning of the NCC and other matters.
6. The NCC is headed by an officer of the rank of Lieutenant General

called the Director General, (DG) NCC. His office is at New Delhi.
He is assisted by two Additional Director Generals (ADGs), one
Major General and the other is either a Rear admiral or a Air Vice
Marshal.
7. At the state level, there are 17 NCC Directorates covering all states
and Union Territories. The Directorates are headed by an officer of
the rank of Brigadier or equivalent and designated as Deputy
Director General NCC. Each of the NCC Directorates controls two
to fourteen Group Headquarters, headed by an officer of the rank of
Colonel or its equivalent. Each NCC Group Headquarters controls 5
– 7 units (Bns). These units are commanded by Lt Col or their
equivalent. In all there are 95 Gp HQs in the country which exercise
control over a network of 657 Army wing units, 59 Naval wing units
and 58 Air squadrons.
8. The professors and teachers from colleges and schools are

specially trained to impart training to the cadets, as Associate NCC
Officers (ANOs).
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF NCC
Government of India
Ministry of Defence
↓
Direcotr General NCC
Rank: Lieutenant General
Headquarters: New Delhi
↓
Deputy Director General NCC
Rank: Brigadier / Equivalent
At State Level
Headquarters at State Capital
↓
Group Commander NCC
Rank: Colonel / Equivalent
↓
Commanding Officer
Rank: Lieutenant Colonel / Equivalent
Headquarters in different towns / cities
↓
Colleges Company/Platoon Commanders
Rank: ANOs of the rank of Sub Lt. to Lt. Cdr
Schools Troops. Third Officer to Chief Officer
Headquarters in different Schools / Colleges
SECTION 2
PHILOSOPHY OF TRAINING
9. Introduction. Based on the aims of NCC. The syllabus of NCC has

been made. The syllabus for the Junior Division cadets covers a
period of 02 years.
10. Training Activities. The training activities of NCC can be broadly

classified as under.
(a) Institutional Training Camps and Attachment Training.

The following activities form a part of institutional training-
(i) Camp Training. Each Cadet is expected to attent at least

01 camp to be eligible to appear for Certificate ‘A’ Exam.
The various types of camps are as follows:
(aa) Annual Training Camp (ATC). These are held

within the State by the respective NCC directorates
and their duration is of 10 days.
(ab) Centrally Organized Camps (COC). These

camps are of an All India nature and are planned by
HQ NCC, New Delhi in consultation with the
Directorates nominated to conduct them. Eg
Leadership Camps, Thal Sainik Camp (TSC), Vayu
Sainik Camp (VSC), Nau Sainik Camp (NSC), Rock
Climbing Camps, National Integration Camps,
Republic Day Camp (RDC).
(ii) Attachment Training. NCC cadets are attached to

various prestigious academies like Naval Academy
(NAVAC), Indian Military Academy (IMA), Officers Training
Academy (OTA), Military hospitals and other military units
for Attachment training regularly.
(b) Social Services and Community Development

Activities. Some of the Social Service and Community
Development Activities done in NCC are tree plantation,
blood donation, visit to Old Age Homes, adult education,
beach/village cleaning drives, sanitation drives, anti-plastic
drives, relief during disasters, AIDS awareness drives and
Cancer awareness programs etc.
(c) Youth Exchange Program (YEP). NCC in India has YEP
with the NCC of other countries like UK, Canada,
Singapore, Bangladesh, Australia, Hong Kong, Russia and
Trinidad and Tobago etc. wherein the cadets visit that
country to participate in their NCC activities. It helps in
creating awareness amongst cadets and promotes
international understanding and brotherhood.
(d) Adventure Training and Sports. NCC participates in

Subroto Cup Football Tournament, Jawahar Lal Nehru
Hockey tournament and Mavalnkar Shooting Championship
on regular basis. In addition, NCC cadets participate in
Mountaineering, Trekking, Cycle/Motorcycle Expeditions,
Parachute sailing, Para Courses, Slithering, Desert safari
and White Water Rafting.
11. Eligibility Criterion for ‘A’ Certificate Examinations. To appear,

a cadet must have undergone training of 02 years in Junior Division
/ Wing with minimum 75% attendance and must have attended one
Annual Training Camp. The pass marks are 40% in each subject
with an aggregate of 50% marks.
Note. Grading in ‘B’ & ‘C’ certificate examinations is as follows:-
(a) A Grade – 80% and above.
(b) B Grade – below 80% and above 65%
(c) C Grade – 50%
12. Promotions of Junior Division.
(a) Ordinary Cadet - On Enrolment.
(b) Able Cadet - 3 Months as Cadet.
(c) Leading Cadet - 6 Months as Able Cadet.
(d) PO Cadet - 6 Months as Leading Cadet + One Camp.

SECTION 3
NCC SONG
13. Introduction. The Director of documentary film on NCC, ‘A Cadet’s
Diary’ happened to hear the song ‘Hum Sab Hindi Hain’, which was
first sung at a Youth festival at Chandigarh sometime during 1968-
69. He introduced it in his documentary film and the song was a hit
and played repeatedly at RD Camps. In 1980, the word ‘Hindi’ was
substituted with ‘Bharatiya’.
NCC Song
Hum sab Bhartiya hai, Hum sab Bhartiya hai

Apni Manzil ek hai, ha ha ha ek hai, ho ho ho ho ek hai
Hum sab Bhartiya Hain
Kashmir Ki dharti Rani hai, Sartaz Himalaya hai

Sadiyon se hum ne isko apne khoon se pala hai
Desh ki Raksh ki khatir, hum shamsheer utha lenge
Hum shamsheer utha lenge
Bikhre bikhre tare hain hum, lekin jhilmil ek hain
Ha ha ha ek hain, ho ho ho ek hain
|| Hum sab Bhartiya hain ||
Mandir gurudware bhee hain yahan. Aur masjid bhi hai yahan
Girjia ka ghadiyal kaheen mullla ki kaheen hai azan
Ek hee apna ram hai ek hee allah tala hain,
Ek hee allah tala hain
Rang birange deepak hain hum, lekin mehfil ek hain
Ha ha ha ek hain, ho ho ho ek hain.
Ab saree duniya me koye humjung na hone dehge

Ab ham manav ko aisi mouth ki neendh na sone denge
Aman hai apne punji hai Aman hai apne tara hain
Aman hai apne tara hai
Unchi neechi lahare hain hum lekin sahil ek hain
Ha ha ha ek hai, ho ho ho ek hain

CHAPTER II
NATIONAL INTEGRATION
SECTION 1
INDIAN CULTURE AND ITS HERITAGE
1. Various races have been coming to India from time
immemorial. The civilization of these races differed a great
deal from one another. On entering India, through the
process of assimilation and synthesis, Indian culture grew all
the richer.
2. Negrito Race. According to JH Huntton, the oldest race that
reached India was the Negrito Race. They did not know how
to make use of the instruments made of stones and bones,
how to cultivate land, how to make earthen wares or how to
build houses. They are now found in Andaman Island only.
3. Proto-Australiod Race. The race which arrived in India
after the Negrito race was Proto-Australiod or the primitive
Australian race. Indians learnt from them, in the material
field, how to cultivate the land with the help of pick-axe and
to grow rice, bananas, coconuts, brinjals, betel leaves,
lemons and cotton from them. In the religious field, they
brought to India many things like the belief in rebirth, various
fabulous stories about the existence of Gods in stones, the
worship of various creatures like snakes, crocodiles,
monkeys etc.
4. Arrival of Dravidians and their influence. The people of
Dravidian or Mediterranean race came to India after the
Proto-Australoid race. They were more civilized than the
people of both the races which came to India earlier. Under
their influence new Gods and new methods of worship came
to India. In fact, the word ‘Pooja’ (worship) belongs to
Dravidian language. The acceptance of an idol, as
representative of some God, to offer it flowers and tree
leaves, to offer it vermilion and sandal paste to burn incense
before it to ring bells, to sing to dance before it, to offer and
accept sweets and such other ways of worship were given to
India by the Dravidians. Under the Dravidian influence, the
number of Gods in the Hindu religion is supposed to be 330
million. They also preached the worship of the trees, like
worship of tulsi, banyan, peepal and many others. It was the
Dravidians who gave Indians the festivals of Holi and
Basant.
5. Arrival of the Aryans. Aryans made the greatest
contribution towards the development of Indian culture. It is
their tongue which is in use today in major parts of India.
Their Vedas are the main roots of Indian culture. The
contribution of the Aryans towards the Indian culture has
been the ‘Varna’ system mainly.
6. Muslim Influence. Muslims came to India after the Aryans.

Their influence has been seen especially on Hindu customs,
on the very minute things of their family, on music, dress,
cooking methods, marriage traditions, festivals, and fairs and
on the institutions and manners of the Maratha, Rajput and
Sikh courts.
7. Influence of British. After the Mulims, the British deeply

influenced all aspects of Indian culture. The spread of
English language brought hundreds of English words into the
Indian languages. The influence of western culture on the
prose, novel, one-act plays and poetry, etc. in Indian
literature can be clearly seen. On the one hand, the ideas of
equality, freedom and nationality helped in uprooting the
social evils like Sati custom, killing of female child, child
marriage and prohibition of widow marriage; on the other
hand, they created a political awakening in the country. The
present form of administration in India is the outcome of the
influence of the British ideology. This influence has regularly
been on the increase and it is also needed for the country’s
progress, although its assimilation is equally necessary.
8. Conclusion. India’s culture has been such that it did not

develop into a finished form in any period. Throughout her
long history, India’s culture has been changing and
developing due to internal factors and contacts with other
cultures. This process of change and development
continues. The culture of India, as of any other country, is
not as fixed entity. Many aspects of culture, if they progress
get discarded, others are changed, sometimes beyond
recognition; some others continue to survive and remain
impertinent, while many new elements are added. A
remarkable feature of Indian historical and cultural
development has been its continuity. This continuity has few
parallels in the history of other civilizations. As Indians we
should be proud of our culture heritage.
SECTION 2
INDIAN RELIGIONS
Religions of India
9. India’s people inherited a civilization that began more than

4,500 years ago, one that has proven capable of absorbing
and transforming the peoples and cultures that over the
centuries have come to the subcontinent. India has long
supported a large population of great diversity. The people in
India’s intricate network of communities speak literally
thousands of languages, practice all of the world’s great
religions, and participate in a complex social structure that
incorporates the caste system, a rigid system of social
hierarchy. India is a multi – religious democratic country.
There are six main religions in India as explained in the
succeeding paragraphs.
10. Hinduism. About 83.5% of the India population is Hindus.

The word Hindu is derived from the Sanskrit word ‘Sindhu’
(Indus River). The Persians in the 5th Century BC called the
Hindus by that name, identifying them as the people of the
land of the Indus. The Hindus define their community as
“those who believe in the Vedas” or “those who follow the
way (Dharma) of the four classes (Vernas) and stages of life
(Ashramas)”. Hinduism is a major world religion since about
1500 BC. The ultimate canonical authority for all Hindus are
the Vedas. The oldest of the four Vedas is the Rig-veda,
which was composed in an ancient form of the Sanskrit
language in northwest India and composed between about
1500 and 1000 BC. The Rig-Veda was supplemented by two
other Vedas, the Yajur-Veda (the textbook for sacrifice) and
the Sama-Veda (the hymnal). A fourth book, the Atharva-
Veda (a collection of magic spells), was probably added
around 900 BC. Between the 8th century BC and the 5th
Century BC, the Upanishads were composed. These are
mystical-philosophical meditations on the meaning of
existence and the nature of the universe. The two great
Sanskrit epics of Hindus are the Mahabharata and the
Ramayana. Furthermore, many Sanskrit Puranas, including
18 great Puranas and several dozen more subordinate
Puranas; and the many Dharmashastras and Dharmasutras
(textbooks on sacred law), are the most frequently cited
Hindu texts.
11. Islam. Islam is one of the three major world religions, along
with Judaism and Christianity that profess monotheism, or
the belief in a single God. In the Arabic language, the word
Islam means “surrender” or “submission” – submission to the
will of God. A follower of Islam is called a Muslim, which in
Arabic means “one who surrenders to God”. About 10.7% of
the Indian population comprises of Muslims. Islam’s central
teaching is that there is only one all-powerful, all-knowing
God, and this God created the Universe. This rigorous
monotheism, as well as the Islamic teaching that all Muslims
are equal before God, provides the basis for a collective
sense of loyalty to God that transcends class, race,
nationality, and even differences in religious practice. Thus,
all Muslims belong to one community, the umma,
irrespective of their ethnic or national background. The
Quran, the inscription of buildings of verses from the Quran
symbolizes the living presence of the holy book in Islamic
society.
12. Christianity. Christianity the way of peace, love and service

was founded by Jesus Christ. Christianity is the largest
religious group in the world. Christ was born in BC 4 in
Judea. He started preaching about the kingdom of God,
when he was 30 years of age. His activities roused the
opposition of the Jewish high priests who accused him of
blasphemy. He was crucified under the orders of Pontius
Pilate, the Roman Governor. After three days, Christ was
resurrected from the dead. With the resurrection of Christ,
his disciples took heart and went about preaching the
Kingdom of God to all the peoples of the world. The Bible is
the holy book of Christians. They observe Sunday as a day
of prayer and worship. Christmas and Easter are the
festivals of the Christians.
13. Jainism. Jainism was founded by Vardhamana Jnatiputra or

Nataputta Mahavira (599-527 BC), called ‘Jina’ (Spiritual
Conqueror). The Jains revere certain saints, whom they call
‘Tirthankaras’ (“prophets or founders of the path”). Mahavira
is believed to have been the 24th Tirthankara. The Jains
admit in practice the institution of caste, perform a group of
16 essential rites, called Samskaras, prescribed for the first
three Varna (castes) of Hindus, and recognize some of the
minor deities of the Hindu pantheon. Nevertheless, their
religion, like Buddhism, is essentially atheistic.
Fundamental to Jainism is the doctrine of two eternal, coexisting,
independent categories known as ‘Jiva’ (animate, living soul; the
enjoyer) and ‘Ajiva’ (inanimate, nonliving object; the enjoyed). They
believe that one can attain salvation (Moksha) only by freeing the soul
of karma through the practice of the three “jewels” of right faith, right
knowledge and right conduct. The two main sects of Jainism are the
Digambara (space-clad or naked) and the Svetambara (white-clad,
wearers of white cloth). The places of pilgrimage of Jains are Mountain
of Samata in Bihar, Pavapuri, Mt Abu in Rajasthan and
Shravanabelagola in Karnataka.
14. Buddhism. Buddhism, a major world religion, founded in Northeastern
India and based on the teachings of Siddhartha Gautama, who is
known as the Buddha, or the Enlightened One. The Buddha not only
rejected significant aspects of Hindu philosophy, but also challenged
the authority of the priesthood, denied the validity of the Vedic
scriptures, and rejected the sacrificial cult based on them. Moreover,
he opened his movement to members of all castes, denying that a
person’s spiritual worth is a matter of birth. Buddhism today is divided
into two major branches known to their respective followers as
Theravada (the Way of the Elders) and Mahayana (the Great Vehicle).
The most sacred places of Buddhism are Lumbini in Nepal (where
Buddha was born). Bodh Gaya in Bihar (where he received
enlightenment) and Kusinagara in UP (where he attained Nirvana).
15. Sikhism. Sikhism is an ethical monotheism fusing elements of
Hinduism and Islam. It was founded by Nanak (1469-1539), a mystic
who believed that God transcends religious distinctions. Influenced by
the devotional emphasis of bhakti Hinduism and Sufi Islam, Sikhism
stresses the unity, truth and creativity of a personal God and urges
union with him through meditation on his title, the Name (Nam), and
surrender to his will. Smoking and intoxicants are forbidden, Sikhism
also rejects the Hindu caste system, priesthood, image worship, and
pilgrimage, although it retains the Hindu doctrines of transmigration
and karma. The ultimate spiritual authority is the ‘Adi Granth’,
consisting of hymns by the ten Sikh Gurus (teachers). Adi Granth is
the religious book of the Sikhs. Sikhs are expected to join the Khalsa
(Punjabi for “pure”), a religious and military order. Initiates are
“baptized” by drinking sweetened water stirred with a sword, after
which Sikh men take the surname Singh (“lion”) and women take the
surname Kaur (“prince” or here, “princess”). Members of the Khalsa
are instructed to observe the five k’s: They must wear four symbols of
the Sikh faith – soldiers’ shorts (kaccha), an iron bangle (kara), a steel
sword (kirpan), and a comb (kangha) – and they must not cut their hair
(kesh).
SECTION 3
CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS OF INDIA
16. Knowing the customs of a country is, in effect, a guide to

understanding the soul of that country and its people. The following
paragraphs will provide a glimpse into the unique world of Indian
customs, how people marry, how families celebrate holidays and
other occasions, what people eat, and how they socialize and have
fun.
Marriage and Family
17. Many marriages are still arranged by parents, the degree to which
the children are consulted depends on the family. Marriage is
sacred to most Indians and is considered to endure beyond death.
Weddings are times of great celebration, expense, and feasting. In
many Hindu ceremonies, the bride and groom exchange garlands
and promises before they circle around a fire seven times to
solemnize the marriage. Bright clothing, jewelry, and flowers are
part of almost every type of ceremony. The bride’s parents
commonly give a dowry, such as money or land, to the groom’s
family, although the practice is illegal.
18. Indians are generally religious and family oriented, and their lives
are deeply rooted in tradition. The interests of the family take
precedence over those of the individual. Families are generally
large, but the government is actively encouraging family planning to
curb rapid population growth. Extended families often live together
or near each other, and form the basic social and economic unit of
rural Indian society. The elderly are respected and cared for by
their families. The father is considered the head of the household.
Middle-class families, especially in urban areas, are becoming
more nuclear. A middle – or upper-class father expects to take care
of the children financially until they have finished an education and
taken a job – regardless of how long it takes. Most working – and
middle-class women work outside the home due to economic
necessity, and a growing number of urban women are joining the
professional workforce.
Eating
19. Foods vary widely in India, depending on the culture and the
region. For example, rice is a stage in the south, while roti (wheat
bread) is the staple in the north. Indian meals are usually very spicy
Different types of curry, made with eggs, fish, meat or vegetables,
are popular. Vegetarianism is widely practiced, often for religious
reasons. All castes and religions have their own rules and customs
governing food. Hindus consider cows to be sacred and they, like
Sikhs, will not eat beef. Observant Muslims do not eat pork or drink
alcohol.
20. Eating habits also vary considerably. Traditional families may use
the right hand instead of utensils for eating their food. Also, women
often eat after other members of the family and any guests.
Soscializing
21. The Namaste is the traditional greeting used in India. It is

performed by pressing the palms together (fingers up) below the
chin, and saying “Namasthe” (Namaskaram in the south). To greet
superiors or to show respect, a slight bow is added. “Hellow” and
“Hi” are also acceptable greetings. Out of respect for a woman’s
privacy, Indian men do not usually shake hands with or touch
women in formal or informal gatherings. It is polite to use titles such
as Shri for a man, Shreemati for a married woman, Kumari for an
unmarried woman, or the suffix –ji with a last name to show
respect. Muslims use the “Salaam” gesture of greeting, which is
performed by raising the right hand toward the forehead, with the
index finger pointing to the forehead and the rest of the hand
pointing upwards. It is similar to a salute but not as rigid or formal.
Indians usually ask permission before taking leave of others.
22. Most visiting occurs in the home, and visits between friends or
family are often unannounced. At social gatherings, guests are
often adored with a garland of flowers, which they then remove and
carry in the hand as an expression of humility.
23. Many Indians do not wear shoes inside the home and remove their
shoes before entering the Living Room. Hosts offer their guests
refreshments such as tea or coffee and fruit or sweets, which it is
polite to decline once or twice before eventually accepting. In
temples, saffron powder, holy water from the Ganges River, and
sometimes sweets are offered to visitors as Prasad, or blessings
from the gods; it is discourteous to refuse these gifts. Women cover
their heads when entering sacred places. In traditional society,
women are often not involved in social functions.
SECTION 4
UNITY IN DIVERSITY
24. India is a vast country with diversity in caste, religion, customs and
traditions where people from different ethnological groups having
different languages or dialects, follow different rituals in daily life
and work together shoulder to shoulder. In spite of diversity in
physical features and social systems, there is unity in India. It is
held together by many ties like territory, language, culture and
economic inter-dependence etc. Our history is replete with
examples that illustrate the set-backs suffered by us because of out
disunity. Mohammed Gauri was able to set his foot on Indian soil
because of internal friction and disunity between two Indian rulers.
The British too followed the policy of ‘Divide and Rule’ and kept the
doors of freedom closed, because they could disunite Indians
easily.
25. People from different background and culture participated in

Indian’s struggle for freedom. The national leaders, particularly
Mahatma Gandhi, Nehru, Azad and Bose had coined the slogan
‘Unity in Diversity’. Be it Hindu, Muslim, Buddhist, Jain and Sikhs
everybody had a single identity of being an Indian. Modern India
presents a picture of unity in diversity where people of different
faiths and beliefs live together in peace and harmony. Still today
also India remains one of the most ethnically diverse countries in
the world.
26. The abstract motto “Unity in Diversity” or in Sanskrit Hindi

“Vibhinnata Mein Ekta” recognizes the actually existing diversity,
and at the same time maintains the unity that has a complementary
relationship to it. Hence unity and diversity, so the thesis and at the
same time also the imperative associated with it, are not
contradictory but complementary; Difference is not to be negated
but has to be transcended. In other words” “Unity in Diversity”
welds together individuals into groups.
27. with over one billion citizens, India is the second most populous
nation in the world. It is impossible to speak of any one Indian
culture, although there are deep cultural continuities that tie its
people together. English is the major language of trade and
policies, but there are 16 official languages in all. There are 24
languages that are spoken by a million people or more, and
countless other dialects. India has seven major religions and many
minor ones, six main ethnic groups, and countless holidays.
28. Religion is central to Indian culture, and its practice can be seen in
virtually every aspect of life in the country. Hinduism is the
dominant faith of India, serving about 80 percent of the population.
Ten percent embrace Islam and five percent are Sikhs or
Christians: the remainder (a good 45 million) is Buddhists, Jains,
Parsis, Bahais, among others. A lot of festivals are celebrated with
a great zeal in India in spite of all whether the festival is Hindu
oriented or Christian or whatever. This is Unity in Diversity of
different festivals. All religions are treated equally and given equal
preference. Thus we can say that Modern India presents a picture
of unity in diversity where people of different faiths and beliefs live
together in peace and harmony and world peace is the only motto
of all Indians.
Relevance of NCC in Unifying Indian
29. NCC creates awareness amongst youth about the diverse heritage
of our country and fosters national integration despite linguistic,
cultural, religious and geographical barriers. It helps cadets gain
experience to live together, co-operate with each other and work in
harmony with cadets of other states whom they have not known
before, thus helping in strengthening unity as under:-
(a) Ethics and Social Values. These are very important

values in day-to-day activities on the ground and are the
essentials of personality. NCC helps to cultivate these
values through which the spirit of unity and ignities the
values of personal sacrifice in the minds.
(b) Cultural and Traditional Values. Our country has diverse

groups which have been divided on grounds of religion,
caste, creed and language. NCC organizes various camps
and group activities where ample opportunity is given to
the cadets to closely watch the cultural and traditional
shows of other regions. It provides the cadets with an
opportunity to appreciate each others uniqueness and
cultivate freindhsip.
(c) Discipline and Patriotism. A cadet is trained to given

selfless service to society and be available anytime for
national cause. NCC can be described as the nation’s
disciplined, trained and motivated young force available for
national service.
SECTION 4
IMPORTANCE OF NATIONAL INTEGRATION
30. Introduction. Indian civilization is one of the oldest civilizations in

the world. In the past people belonging to different races and
religions came and settled here. They brought with them their
distinctive language and life style. Different tribes with their distinct
languages intermingled with various tribes of our country. That is
why our culture is described as an example of composite culture. It
is made up of all communities, races and religions.
31. National Integration. National integration means a feeling of

togetherness and unity among the people of a country. It also
means an atmosphere in which all citizens, irrespective of their
caste, religion and region live together peacefully. It refers to
integration in all respects, social political, economic and above all
emotional. In an integrated country people share common goals.
They all work together and co-operate with each other for the
prosperity of the nation. National integration does not mean
uniformity of all. It does not stand for uniformity of region, dress and
food habits etc. It means that both – preservation of diverse
cultures and at the same time living and working in harmony with
each other. No country or society can survive if its people do not
remain united. The feeling of togetherness and a sense of
belonging are absolutely necessary for a nation to survive. Such a
feeling can only be generated through the process of integration.
Thus, National Integration is a positive concept which provides
strength to the people to fight against all evil forces. It provides a
congenial condition in which people can make good progress.
Importance of National Integration
32. National integration has assumed greater importance in the recent

years due to the fast changing ethos and moral values in the
society. The turbulent atmosphere and the deteriorating law and
order situation in the country due to various religious, social and
political factors have led to the realization of the necessity of
National Integration.
33. The realization of its importance in itself is a step in the desired

direction. The Government having appreciated the urgency and
seriousness of the subject is taking positive steps towards
achieving the National Integration. It is important for:-
(a) Maintenance of sovereignty and territorial integrity of the
nation.
(b) Maintenance of peace and harmony.
(c) Growth and development of the nation.
(d) Eradication of poverty and illiteracy.
(e) Internal security and law and order.
(f) Culture and religious development.
(g) Economic and industrial growth.
(h) Attract foreign investment and increase import and export.
(i) Exchange of technological know-how and culture.
(j) Dignity and self respect as a nation.
(k) Welfare and well-being of the people.
(l) Foreign relations and better standing among the nations of

the world.
34. It is the duty of each and every citizen of our country to strive to
achieve unity in spite of diversity and further cement it. We must
remember that there should be no divisions between North and
South or East and West of India. There is only one India of which
we all Indians are inheritors.
35. NCC, one of the prime organizations of the country training the
youth, the future of this great nation, makes the ideal ground to
start with. National integration has been made part and parcel of
NCC training. Lot of emphasis is laid on national integration by
conducting national level camps and number of other activities
where cadets from all over the country participate.
36. National integration assumes greater importance particularly in a

country like India where people with different languages, religions,
races and culture are required to be weaved together. The unity in
diversity of which we are proud of can only be maintained if we
have the understanding and respect for each other’s religion,
customs and traditions. It is said that ‘United we stand and divided
we fall’. If we have to survive as a nation and safeguard our
sovereignty and national integrity, we have to remain united.
SECTION 5
FAMOUS LEADERS OF INDIA
Mahatma Gandhi
37. Gandhi, Mohandas Karamchand (1869-1948), Indian nationalist

leader, who established his country’s freedom through a non-violent
revolution. Gandhi, also known as Mahatma Gandhi, was born in
Porbandar in the present state of Gujarat on October 2, 1869, and
educated in law at University College, London.
38. In 1891, Gandhi returned to India. Two years later he went to work
in Durban, South Africa. He threw himself into the struggle for
elementary rights for Indians. Gandhi remained in South Africa for
20 years, suffering imprisonment many times. Gandhi considered
the terms passive resistance and civil disobedience inadequate for
his purposes, however, and coined another term, Satyagraha
(Sanskrit for “truth and firmness”). In 1914, the government of the
Union of South Africa made important concessions to Gandhi’s
demands, including recognition of Indian marriages and abolition of
poll tax for them. His work in South Africa complete, he returned to
India.
39. When, in 1919, Parliament passed the Rowlatt Acts, giving the
Indian colonial authorities emergency powers to deal with so-called
revolutionary activities. Satyagraha spread through India. A
demonstration against the Rowlatt Acts resulted in a massacre of
Indians at Jallianwala Bagh in Amritsar by British soldiers. In 1920,
when the British government failed to make amends, Gandhi
proclaimed an organized campaign of non-cooperative Indians in
public office resigned, government agencies such as courts of law
were boycotted, and Indian children were withdrawn from
government schools. Through India, streets were blocked by
squatting Indians who refused to rise even when beaten by police.
Gandhi was arrested, but the British were soon forced to release
him.
40. Economic independence for India, involving the complete boycott of

British goods, was made a corollary of Gandhi’s Swaraj (Sanskrit,
“self-ruling”) movement in 1921, the Indian National Congress,
gave Gandhi complete executive authority, with the right of naming
his own successor. A series of armed revolts against Britain broke
out, culminating in such violence that Gandhi confessed the failure
of the civil-disobedience campaign he had called, and ended it. The
British government again seized and imprisoned him in 1922.
41. In 1930 the Mahatma proclaimed a new campaign of civil
disobedience, calling upon the Indian population to refuse to pay
taxes, particularly the tax on salt. The campaign was a march to the
sea known as Dandi March, in which thousands of Indians followed
Gandhi from Ahmadabad to the Arabian Sea, where they made salt
by evaporating sea water. Once more the Indian leader was
arrested, but he was released in 1931. In the same year Gandhi
represented the Indian National Congress at a conference in
London.
42. In 1932, Gandhi began new civil-disobedience campaigns against

the British. In September 1932, while in jail, Gandhi undertook a
“fast unto death” to improve the status of the Hindu Untouchables.
In 1942, Gandhi started his famous ‘Quit India’ movement which
awakened the mind of the Britishers and made them realize that
India was not going to bear any injustice now. By 1944 the Indian
struggle for independence was in its final stages. Gandhi stood
steadfastly against the partition of India but ultimately had to agree,
in the hope that internal peace would be achieved after the Muslim
demand for separation had been satisfied. India and Pakistan
became separate states when the British granted India its
independence in 1947.
43. On January 30, 1948, Indian nationalist leader Mohandas Gandhi

was assassinated by a Hindu extremist named Nathuram Godse.
Gandhi was known worldwide for his advocacy of social change
through nonviolence, and his death provoked international
mourning. He is remembered as the ‘Father of the Nation’.
Jawaharlal Nehru
44. Nehru Jawaharlal (1889-1964), Indian nationalist leader and

statesman who was the first Prime Minister of independent India
(1947-1964) and a leader of the Nonaligned Movement during the
Cold War, was born in Allahabad.
45. In 1919 Nehru joined the Indian National Congress. Guided by

Gandhi, he gradually learned about rural India. He was imprisoned
many times for civil disobedience. His longest detentions occurred
between 1932 and 1935, and 1942 and 1945. While in prison, he
wrote his major books, Toward Freedom (1936), an autobiography;
The Discovery of India (1946); and Glimpses of World History
(1934), a series of letters to his daughter, Indira. He was a talented
and expressive writer in English.
46. By the end of World War II (1939-1945), Nehru was recognized as
Gandhi’s heir apparent in the Congress. Although he and Gandhi
differed somewhat in their views of the world, they remained
personally and politically close throughout Gandhi’s lifetime. When
the British formed an interim Indian Government in 1946
preliminary to full independence, by Gandhi’s choice Nehru became
its Prime Minister, and remained its leader until his death in 1964.
47. Upon taking office he moved to implement moderate socialist

economic reforms by means of centralized economic planning.
Nehru also backed plans for community development projects and
the creation of many educational institutions. Throughout the Nehru
years, India’s economy achieved steady growth and its agricultural
production increased though not as rapidly as many hoped. Nehru
also encouraged the development of India’s nuclear energy
program.
Subhas Chandra Bose
48. Bose, Subhas Chandra (1897-1945), Indian nationalist leader, who

during World War II led an Indian national army against the British
and established an independent provisional government of Azad
Hind (Free India). He was popularly known as ‘Netaji’.
49. Bose was born into a family of high-caste Bengalis in Cuttack. Bose
attained presidency College at the University of Calcutta but was
expelled in 1915 for complicity in the beating of a British Professor
who many students felt had maligned Indians. Bose then went to
England, where he studied at the University of Cambridge and
prepared for the Indian Civil Service Examination. He passed the
examination in 1920 but resigned from the service to join the Indina
nationalist movement.
50. After returning to Calcutta (now Kolkatta) in 1921, Bose met

Mohandas Gandhi, then the leader of the Indian National Congress
and on his advice Bose went to work in Bengal. In 1928 he became
a General Secretary of the Indian National Congress and pressed
Gandhi to move quickly and forcefully for complete Indian
independence. Some of the volunteers working under Bose at the
1928 Congress session later formed an underground revolutionary
group called the Bengal Volunteers. Bose’s ties to this group and
their acts of violence, together with his mass following as a
Congress leader, marked him to India’s British rulers as a
dangerous man. Bose’s extremism also troubled Gandhi, whose
commitment to nonviolent methods was unswerving.
51. In 1938, with Gandhi’s blessing but not his confidence, Bose was
elected president of the Indian National Congress. Bose decided to
run for Congress president again the next year, against Gandhi’s
wishers. With the backing of the left (mostly Indian communists and
socialists) and strong support in some provinces, Bose narrowly
defeated Gandhi’s candidate. He soon realized, however, that he
could not run the Congress organization without Gandhi’s support
and so he resigned his presidency. Bose then formed the Forward
Bloc, a pressure group within the Congress working for immediate
direct action against the Raj.
52. Imprisoned again in 1940, Bose undertook a fast, refusing to eat

until he was released. The British released him in December but
placed him under house arrest. With World War II (1939-1945)
under way, and convinced that the British would never leave India
peacefully, Bose decided to flee India and collaborate with a foreign
power hostile to the British. He hoped to recruit and train a military
unit that would combine with forces within India to drive the British
out by violent means. In January 1941 Bose slipped out of Calcutta,
reached the Indian frontier, and walked into Afghanistan. Then he
traveled to Berlin, where he set up the Free India Center, a
propaganda operation that made radio broadcasts to India. He also
formed the Indian Legion, a small fighting force recruited from
Indian prisoners of war taken in North Africa. German director Adolf
Hitler proved uncooperative. However, in February 1943 Hitler
allowed Bose to leave Germany for Southeast Asia.
53. Traveling by submarine and airplane, Bose reached Tokyo in the

spring of 1943. There, with the support of Japanese Prime Minister
Tojo Hideki, Bose assumed the leadership of the Indian National
Army (INA). This force was composed of about 40,000 troops,
mainly Indian prisoners of war captured in Singapore when it fell to
the Japanese in 1942. The army was supported by the Free India
League, a nationalist organization backed by the Indian community
of Southeast Asia. Bose also recruited a regiment of women who
were trained to fight. In October 1943 Bose established the
Provisional Government of Azad Hind (Free India). The provisional
government immediately declared war on the United States and
Britain, and in January it located its capital in Japanese-occupied
Yangon (Rangoon), Burma. Meanwhile, Bose worked diligently to
promote harmony between Hindus, Muslims, and Sikhs within his
army and continued his radio broadcasts to India.
54. In early 1944 Bose induced the Japanese to invade India.
Japanese and INA forces entered India in March, advancing to the
outskirts of Imphal in the northeast. There, they besieged the British
garrison until the beginning of the monsoon rains in June. The rainy
season prevented further attack and gave the British time to
reinforce their positions, and the British were able to turn back the
invading army. In May 1945, the INA surrendered in Yangon. Bose
escaped, making his way eventually to Japanese-occupied Saigon
(now Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam). When Japan announced its
surrender in August, Bose fled Southeast Asia. On the way, his
plane crashed in Taiwan, and Bose died in a Japanese military
hospital.
Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel
55. Patel, Vallabhbhai (1875-1950), Indian nationalist leader, born in
Gujarat. He studied law in England but returned (1915) to India and
practiced in Ahmadabad. Influenced by the nationalist leader
Mohandas Gandhi, he joined the civil disobedience movement and
successfully organized (1928) the landowners of Bardoli against
British tax increases. In 1931 he served as president of the Indian
National Congress. The British imprisoned Patel a number of times
for his activities.
56. As home minister, minister of states, and deputy prime minister
(1947-1950) under Jawaharlal Nehru, Patel adroitly achieved the
peaceful integration of the princely Indian states into the Union. His
swift, cool reaction to Gandhi’s assassination in 1948 is widely
believed to have averted a possible civil war. He is remembered as
the ‘Iron Man’ of India.
Lal Bahadur Shastri
57. Shastri, Lal Bahadur (1904-1966), prime minister of India (1964-
1966), born near Varanasi in Uttar Pradesh. A follower of
Mohandas K. Gandhi, he was imprisoned several times by the
British for nationalist activities. When India achieved independence
(1947), he became a minister in the state government of Uttar
Pradesh, and he later served in the federal cabinet as minister of
transport (1952-1956), industry (1957-1961), and home affairs
(1961-1963). Shastri became prime minister on the death of
Jawaharlal Nehru in 1964. The principal event of his tenure was the
undeclared war with Pakistan over the Rann of Kachchh that began
in April 1965 and subsequently spread to Kashmir. He died
immediately after signing a Soviet-mediated “No-War” agreement
with Pakistan in Toshkent, USSR, in January 1966.
Maulana Abdul Kalam Azad
58. Azad, Maulana Abdul Kalam (1888-1958), Indian journalist and

political leader was one of the major leaders of the Indian
independence movement. Azad was born Mohiuddin Ahmad in
Mecca, Saudi Arabia, and was descended from an old family of
Delhi, India. The family moved to Calcutta (now Kolkata), India,
where Azad was educated privately and studied Arabic and Asian
culture. In 1906 he became assistant editor of a newspaper, but it
was the publication of his own journal, Al-Hital, in 1912 that brought
Azad to the forefront of Indian affairs. This journal marked a new
beginning in the politics of Indian Muslims, for it invited them to join
in the fight for Indian independence. In 1914 the British government
suppressed the journal and imprisoned Azad. Released in January
1920, he took part in the independence movement under
Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi’s leadership. Azad later served
several more terms in jail.
59. Azad was elected president of the Indian National Congress in

1923, the youngest man to hold the office. He was elected again in
1940, and he held the office until 1946. Azad guided the destiny of
the Congress for six years during the most momentous phase of its
history.
60. After India was declared an independence dominion of the British

Commonwealth in 1947, Azad became education minister, an office
he held until his death. During his tenure, he carried out many
reforms, of which the most important were the acceptance of a
national standard for elementary education, reorganization of
secondary and university education, and a great expansion in
technical and scientific education. Azad also published a
commentary on the Quran (Koran), the sacred scripture of Islam, as
well as several theological studies and the work India Wins
Freedom (1959).
Bhagat Singh
61. Bhagat Singh (September 27, 1907 – March 23, 1931) was an
Indian revolutionary, considered to be one of the most famous
martyrs of the Indian freedom struggle. For this reason, he is often
referred to as Shaheed Bhagat Singh. He is also believed by many
to be one of the earliest Marxists in India and has been labeled so
by the Communist party of India (Marxist). He was one of the leader
and founders of the Hindustan Socialist Republican Association.
62. Bhagat Singh was born into a Sikh family to Sardar Kishan Singh
and Vijyavati in the Khatkar Kalan village near Banga in the
Jalandhar district of Punjab. As a child, he was deeply affected by
the Jallianwala Bagh massacre that took place in Punjab in 1919.
When Mahatma Gandhi started the Non Co-operation Movement in
1920, he became an active participant at the age of 13. He had
great hopes that Gandhiji would bring freedom in India. But he was
disappointed when Gandhiji called off this movement following the
Chauri Chaura riot in 1922.
63. In the face of actions by the revolutionaries, the British government

enacted the Defence of India Act to give more power to the police.
The purpose of the act was to combat revolutionaries like Bhagat
Singh. The act was defeated in the council by one vote. However,
the act was then passed under the ordinance that claimed that it
was in the best interest of the public. In response to this act, the
Hindustan Socialist Republican Association planned to explode a
bomb in the assembly where the ordinance was going to be
passed. It was decided that Bhagat Singh and Batukeshwar Dutt,
another revolutionary, would throw the bombs in the assembly.
64. On April 8, 1929, Singh and Dutt threw bombs onto the corridors of
the assembly and shouted “Inquilab Zindabad” (“Long Live the
Revolution”). This was followed by a shower of leaflets starting that
it takes a lour voice to make the deaf hear. The bomb neither killed
nor injured anyone. Singh and Dutt claimed that this was deliberate
on their part, a claim substantiated both by British forensics
investigators who found that the bomb was not powerful enough to
cause injury and by the fact that the bomb was thrown away from
people. Singh and Dutt gave themselves up for arrest after the
bomb blast. He and Dutt were sentenced to ‘Transportation for Life’
for the bombing on June 12, 1929.
SECTION 6
INDIA AND ITS NEIGHBOURS
INDIA AND CHINA
65. Some facts about China. China is the most populous country in
the world. It is also the third largest in terms of area. There are
twenty one provinces, five autonomous regions and three
municipalities, Beijing, Shangai and Tientsin in China. It became a
republic in 1911 and finally turned into a communist state in 1949.
China is primarily an agricultural country. However, it also has a
strong industrial base. It is also a nuclear power. Some important
figures regarding China are listed below-
(a) Capital – Beijing
(b) Area – 1,102,200,000
(c) Literacy – 70%
(d) Religion – Buddhism and Taosim
(e) Currency - Yuan
66. India and China have had cultural and trade relations since time
immemorial. Chinese travelers like Fa-Hein, Huen Tsan and many
others visited India in search of knowledge. An agreement of
perpetual friendship based on the five principles of Panchasheel
was signed between the two countries. India also sponsored the
claim of communist China to have a seat in United Nations.
However, the relation between the two countries got strained over
the border issue. A big chunk of our territory was occupied by the
Chinese. China claimed over 50,000 miles of India territory in the
Himalayan region as its own. In 1959, the Chinese built a road
through Aksai Chin part of the Laddakh region of J and K.
67. The Indi-China relations were spoiled further when China attacked
India in October 1962. Fighting continued for a month through the
dispute regarding the boundary line is yet to be resolved. India has
been doing her best to normalize relations with China. As a result,
relations have improved in the field of culture, education, science
and technology.
68. The Chinese economy is the fastest growing in the world, through
of late it has been showing some signs of slowing down. The
Chinese leadership has set a goal for itself to be militarily, politically
and economically at par with the major powers of the world by
2025. Within the country, the problem of Tibet persists, but it is
being suppressed with a heavy hand, like other movements for
democracy.
INDIA AND SRI LANKA
69. Sri Lanka is an island country in the Indian Ocean. It is about 80 km

east of the Southern tip of India. Sri Lanka became independent on
04 February 1948. It became a republic on 22 nd May 1972. The
militant sections among the Tamils took up arms and demanded a
separate Tamil State (Elam) for themselves. This resulted in
dreadful violence against Tamils in Sri Lanka. The Tamils ran for
safety to India. India showed her concern for the ethnic conflict in
Sri Lanka. She sought a political solution to the problem. In July
1987 India and Sri Lanka signed an agreement to end the crisis.
Under the terms of the agreement India sent the Indian Peace
Keeping Force (IPKF) to help the government of Sri Lanka to curb
violence. The IPKF returned after doing a good job in establishing
peace in Sri Lanka. Though the ethnic problem has not yet been
resolved India and Norway are doing their best to resolve the crisis.
The ceasefire between the government and the Liberation Tamil
Tigers Elam (LTTE) main militant groups after holding for some
time has again been violated. Some facts about Sri Lanka are listed
below:-
(a) Capital – Colombo
(b) Area – 65,610 Sq. KM
(c) Population – 16.9 million
(d) Language – Sinhala, Tamil and English
(e) Literacy – 87%
(f) Religion – Buddhism, Christianity and Islam
(g) Currency – Rupee

INDIA AND PAKISTAN
70. The Islamic Republic of Pakistan lies in the Northwest side of India.
It came into existence on 14 August 1947 as a result of partition of
India. Culturally, both the countries find themselves close to each
other. However, the relations between the two countries are
marked by tension and strains. There have been many areas of
tension and dispute between India and Pakistan, such as the order
and sharing of river-water. We had to fight four wars with Pakistan
in 1949, 1965, 1971 and Kargil war in 1999.
71. The Shimla agreement between the two countries envisaged that
the Kashmir problem will be solved through bilateral talks. India has
voiced her displeasure over Pakistan raising the Kashmir issue in
international forum. India maintains that Pakistan has always
fomented trouble for India by earlier aiding the terrorist in Punjab
and now in Kashmir. The two countries have decided to promote
the idea of people – to people contact. Opening of Wagha and Uri
border road links and Munabao – Gadara rail link between the two
countries has further improved relations between its people. There
have been encouraging developments in the field of sports and
cultural contacts between the two countries. Some facts about
Pakistan are listed below:-
(a) Capital – Islamabad
(b) Area – 796.095 Sq. KM
(d) Language – Urdu
(f) Religion – Islam
(g) Currency – Rupee

INDIA AND NEPAL
72. Some facts about Nepal. Nepal is located in the North of India. It
is a land – located country lying between India and China. It si
bounded on the north by Tibet (China), on the South and West by
Bihar and Uttar Pradesh. Some important figures regarding Nepal
are listed below:-
(a) Capital – Kathmandu
(b) Area – 147,181 Sq. KM
(d) Language – Nepali
(f) Religion – Hinduism & Buddhism
(g) Currency – Nepalese Rupee
73. India and Nepal have had cultural and commercial relations since
time immemorial. India extended financial and technological
assistance to Nepal in various fields. India played a considerable
role in the development and modernization of Nepal. Agriculture
and tourism are the mainstays of its economy, however, both have
been hit due to the Maoist insurgency. Though Nepal does not face
any external threats, it is suffering from several internal problems.
Inefficient governments in succession have led to an economic and
social crisis, providing fuel to the Maoist movement.
INDIA AND BHUTAN
74. The kingdom of Bhutan lies in the Eastern Himalayas. It is bordered

on the North by China and on all other sides by India. In 1983
Bhutan became a founder member of the South Asian Association
for Regional Co-operation (SAARC). Ties of religion, culture and
friendship bind the people of India and Bhutan. India has very
special relations with Bhutan. She is responsible for Bhutan’s
communications and also her security. India has made majo0r
contribution to the development of education and technical skills in
Bhutan’s economy. India is closely involved in the development of
education and technical skills in Bhutan. India agencies have been
executing major projects in the fields of tele-communications,
roads, and water resources development. Some facts about Bhutan
are listed below:-
(a) Capital – Thimpu
(b) Area – 465000 Sq. KM
(d) Language – Dzongkha
(f) Religion – Buddhism
(g) Currency – Ngultrum
INDIA AND MYANMAR
75. Myanmar (Burma till 18 Jun 1989) became an independent country

on January 4, 1948. The country is popularly known as the “Rice
Bowl of the Far East”. Myanmar is our neighbor on the Eastern
side. India and Myanmar have been maintaining close relations
since time immemorial. Ties of traditions and culture bind both the
countries in a harmonious relationship. Buddhism is the
predominant religion of the majority in Myanmar. Myanmar, though
a resource rich country, suffers from dismal poverty with a bleak
future. The economy, under the Army, has been suffering from
serious imbalances. With the ceasing of international aid due to the
suppression of the democratic movement and ignoring of a
democratic election in 1990, the economy has been slipping further.
Some facts about Myanmar are listed below:-
(a) Capital – Rangoon
(b) Area – 676553 Sq. KM
(d) Language – Burmese and Tribal
(f) Religion – Buddhism
(g) Currency – Kyat

INDIA AND BANGLADESH
76. Bangladesh emerged as an independent nation in 1971. It was

earlier a province of Pakistan and was called East Pakistan. India
played an important role in the independence of Bangladesh. Indian
forces helped the people of Bangladesh in their struggle against
oppression and domination by West Pakistan. Not only this, India
offered considerable financial and technical assistance to
Bangladesh in her development programs. Both the countries had
maintained friendly relations with each other initially. However, the
relations between Bangladesh and India have not been on the best
of terms ever since the last elections in 2001. The sharing of the
Ganga Waters, illegal migration of Bangladeshis, provision of
shelter to anti-Indian insurgent groups of the North Eastern states,
are some of the prickly issues that have precluded harmonious
relations between the two countries. Internally, Bangladesh faces a
threat from fundamentalist Muslim groups. Activities of the Al-
Qaeda and other Inter Service Intelligence (ISI) backed groups
have increased in Bangladesh. Some facts about Bangladesh are
listed below:-
(a) Capital – Dhaka
(b) Area – 143,999 Sq. KM
(d) Language – Bangla
(f) Religion – Islam
(g) Currency – Taka

SECTION 7
CONTRIBUTION OF YOUTH IN NATION BUILDING
77. General. The youth of a nation are the backbone and the most
powerful force within the nation. They are the hope of the future
and can shape the destiny of a country. History shows that
countries subjected to alien rule have without exception sought the
help of youth in times of crisis. They play a positive role for the
cause of a nation and national integration.
78. Role of Youth. The youth have a leading role in bringing together
the people of different states and religious with a view to integrating
them socially, culturally and geographically.
79. National Integration. The youth act as a catalyst in an already

vibrant country aspiring to find its rightful place in the world politics
and play a more effective role of a true leader. To help India realize
its dreams the youth can and ought to play a leading role in
bringing together the people of different states with diverse religions
and integrate them emotionally, culturally and geographically,
contribute in extricating society from age old stigmas of casteism,
communalism, parochialism and regionalism, help preserve cultural
heritage and infuse the spirit of patriotism, thus keep the country
together and defeat all separatist attempts by unscrupulous
elements.
80. Political Measures. If a nation does not rejuvenate its political

leadership profile it would become old in thought and slow in action.
The youth are the future of a nation and its future leaders. The
opportunity provided at educational level to contribute to politics
should be encouraged and the youth should learn and follow clean
and meaningful politics which can thereafter be translated into
greater national aim.
81. Security. The nation today faces grave security concerns both
externally and internally. This intensifies when viewed with the fact
that our country is a respected democratic country with a secular
base. The terrorist, fundamentalists are a grave danger to out unity.
The youth are the pulse and strength of the nation and with their
alertness and their balanced approach can help in thwarting selfish
designs of the enemy.
82. Social and Cultural. The youth are the privileged persons in the
society who can contribute to development. Therefore, they have a
special responsibility and should actively participate in the
development plans of the nation. Youth should be acquainted with
the major problems facing the country. Firstly, they should study the
basic problem of health, AIDS, environment, nutrition, lack of
education, economic backwardness, ignorance, dowry deaths,
casteism and superstitions / false beliefs of the masses. Our
society is experiencing a constant change and faces the conflicting
ideologies of the past vis-à-vis the West. Our past with a shadow of
casteism, superstition and religious over tunes needs a balanced
approach and the youth can play a very important role in this regard
and educate the general public about the misnomers relating to
superstition. They can establish good rapport with the people so as
to involve them in active participation in social work which will help
to make society a better place to live in.
83. India has already started National Cadet Corps (NCC). National
Social Service (NSS), National Service Volunteer Scheme (NSVS)
and other similar organizations, which are assets to our Nation.
Apart from these measures to canalize youth energy into
constructive channels, following few steps can be taken:-
(a) Films with social upliftment and nation building as

theme would make a fair contribution in installing a
healthy and progressive attitude in the youth. Non
Government Organization (NGO) should also
engage youth in such programs which strengthen
nation building.
(b) There should be integration committees, composed

of representatives of various communities at village,
city, district, state and national level. Youth should
be engaged in such committees to contribute in
society. Youth to train themselves effectively both in
institutional and adventure activities as such
activities imbibe self confidence, harmony and
patriotism.
CHAPTER II
DRILL
SECTION 1
GENERAL AND WORDS OF COMMAND
Power of Command
1. Aim. To inculcate a sense of discipline, improve bearing,

smartness in appearance and turn out, create self-confidence and
to develop the quality of immediate and implicit obedience of
orders.
2. Words of Command. It has the following two parts:-
(a) Cautionary Order.
(i) Alerts the person and enables him to understand the

order.
(ii) It is the prolong part of the order.
(b) Executive Order.
(i) Executes the action of the order.
(ii) It is the short part of the order.
3. Loudness. The loudness or volume of command is to be in direct

proportion with the number of men for whom it is intended and the
distance involved.
4. Distinctness. Proper use should be made of the tongue, lips and

teeth to enable formation of separate sounds and syllables.
Indistinct commands cause confusion.
5. Inflection. The start of the cautionary command is near the normal

pitch of the voice and the executive command should be in a higher
pitch.
6. Snap. Snap is the extra quality in command that demands

instantaneous response; it expresses confidence, alertness and
decisiveness. Knowledge of the words of command is essential.
7. Timings of Words of Command. An interval of about four paces

in quick time should be left between the ‘Cautionary’ and the
‘Executive’.
8. Savdhan (Attention). In this position a person stands smartly with
heels together and in line, feet turned out making an angle of 45
degress with each other, knees straight stomach in, chest out,
shoulders level and square and pressed slightly back, neck erect
and balanced, both arms well closed to the body, first fully closed
and thumb along in line of seam of the trouser and look at your
height. The weight of the body should be balanced on both the feet.
******** Picture of page No.34
9. Vishram (Stand at Ease). On this order keeping the legs straight,

carry the left foot 12 to 14 inches to the left with the weight of the
body evenly on the both legs and at the same time carry your both
hands behind so that right hand back on the left hand palm, fingers
and thumb crossing and pointing straight down.
10. Aram Se (Stand Easy). On this order persons are permitted to

move the limbs and relax upper part of the body. However, no
movements to the legs or hands are permitted to ensure dressing
of the squad is not disturbed. Persons standing at “Aram Se” when
receive caution such as “Squad” of “Platoon” or “Parade” or
“Division” will automatically assume the position of “Vishram”.
11. Tham me Mudna (Turning at the Halt.

(a) Dahine Mud (Right Turn). This drill is performed in two
movements keeping a pause of two marching paces
between each as follows:-
(i) Ek. Keeping both knees straight, both arms well closed to
the side and keeping the body erect, turn 90 degrees to
the right with the right heel and left toe, whist raising the
left heel and right toe.
(ii) Do. Bring the left heel smartly up to the right without
stamping the foot on the ground and assume the position
of “Savdhan”.
(b) Bayen Mud (Left Turn). As explained in sub-para (a) above
but using the left heel and right toe. Right heel is to be
brought up to left to assume the position of “Savdhan”.
(c) Peeche Mud (About Turn). This drill is performed in two
movements keeping a pause of two marching paces
between each as follows:-
(i) Ek. Turn 180 degrees through right using right foot heel
and left foot toe with right toe and left heel raised. Both
hands to remain well closed to the body, shoulders
square and looking at own height.
(ii) Do. Bring the left foot heel with the right foot heel and
assume the position of “Savdhan”.
(d) Adha Dahine (or Bayen) Mud (Right / Left in0cline). As

described for “Dahine (or Bayen) Mud”, but turning only half
right (or left).
SECTION 3
SIZING, FORMING UP IN THREE RANKS, NUMBERING
AND CLOSE ORDER MARCH AND DRESSING
Sizing up and Forming up in three Ranks
12. Formation of Squad. A squad is formed in single, two or three

lines depending upon the strength of personnel as follows:-
(a) 5 and below - Single Line.
(b) 6 to 9 - Two Lines.
(c) 10 and above - Three Lines.
13. Sizing Up. The order ‘Lambe Baju Chote Madhya, Ek/ Do / Teen
Line Mein Kar War’ is given to size up the platoon or squad. At this
order, the whole platoon will turn to right and then, taller men will
shift to outer files and shorter will change their position towards
center within their lines.
14. Teen Line Mein Squad Banana (Formation of Squad in Three

Ranks). Squads are normally formed for drill in three ranks. The
right marker having been placed, men fall in at the double in three
ranks. The distance between each rank should be one arm length,
interval between men are also at one arm length. Men in the center
and rear ranks take dressing from right / left and also from the front.
When the squad consists of number of men which is not a multiple
of three, a blank file is to be formed in the second file from the left
flank of the squad.
15. Ginti Karna (Numbering). The order “Ginti Kar” is to be given for
numbering the personnel of a platoon. At this order, the right hand
man of the “Agli Line” calls “Ek” the next “Do” and so on in rapid
succession to left. The numbers are to be called sharply and loudly.
When in two or three lines, the “Pichli Line” and “Madhya Line” do
not call out number, but each person note the number of his
respective person in front of him.
Close and Open Order March
16. Khule Line Chal (Do Line Se) (Open Order March in Two
Lines). In two lines squad, on the order “Khule Line Chal” the
whole “Pichli Line” will take two paces to the rear and the “Agli Line”
will stand fast. However, at parades to have uniformity in platoons
the “Agli Line” may take two steps forward and whole “Pichli Line”
will take one step forward, taking dressing from the right.
17. Khule Line Chal (Teen line se) (Open Order March in Three
Lines). This order is given when the squad is going to be inspected
by an officer. On the order “Khule Line Chal” all personnel in “Agli
Line” will take two steps forward and at the same time personnel in
“Pichli Line” will take two steps to the rear. The “Madhya Line” will
stand fast.
18. Nikat Line Chal (Do Line Se) (Close Order March). On this order,
the “Pichli Line” will take two steps to the front. However, during
parades, the “Agli Line” may take two steps to the rear and “Pichli
Line” will take one step to the rear.
19. Nikat Line Chal (Teen Line Se) (Close Order March). This order
is given when the squad is in “Khule Line Chal” to bring back the
squad in three line formation. At this order the “Agli Line” to take
two steps to the rear and “Pichli Line” to take two steps to the
forward, taking dressing from the right.
Dressing
20. Squad ko Dahine/ Bayen Se Gajana (Dressing up of the

Squad).
(a) On the order “Dahine (Or Bayen) Se Saj”, each person

except the one on the named flank, looks towards his/her
right (or left) with a smart turn of head and eyes
simultaneously.
(b) The personnel in the “Agli Line” extend their right (or left)
arm horizontally, behind the back of their right (or left)
person, fingers fully clenched and thumb along.
(c) Every person except the right (or left) hand file, after a pause
of two marching paces, take quick and short steps to the
required direction and take up dressing in line until his / her
knuckles are in the same vertical line as the shoulder of the
person on his/her right (or left) and he / she is just able to
distinguish the lower part of the face of the second person
from him/her. Care must be taken to carry the body
backward or forward with the feet, the shoulders being kept
perfectly square in their original position.
(d) The right (or left) hand persons of the center and rear lines
will raise their hands to the front and maintain one pace
interval from the front and pick up dressing.
(e) After the platoon has picked up dressing, the second person
of right (or left) flank of “Agli Line” will cut his/her hand to the
side and simultaneously turn the head and eyes to the front.
The remaining persons of the “Agli Line” are to follow the
same drill in quick succession. The persons in the center
and rear lines also turn their head and eyes to the front
together with the person in “Agli Line”.
Note: Where it is required to dress without intervals, the order “Bina

Fasle Dahine (or Bayen) Se Saj” is to be given. At this order each
person closes in, occupying only 24 inches distance in the ranks.
SECTION 4
SALUTING AT THE HALT, GETTING ON PARADE,
FALLING OUT AND DISMISSING
21. Samne Salute. The naval salute shall be made by raising the right
hand on the peak of the cap naturally and smartly, through the
shortest route, with the thumb and fingers straight and close
together, elbow in line with the shoulder, forearm making an angle
of 45 degrees with upper arm, the palm slightly inclined and the
fingers touching the rim of the peak over the right eye. After a
pause of one second (or two marching paces), cut the right hand
smartly to the right side.
******* Picture of page No. 38
22. Getting on Parade. The squad forms up on the end of the Parade
Ground facing in the direction to be on parade. The right guide or
right hand man acts as the Right Marker and takes his position on
the order ‘Darshak’. On the order ‘Parade Par’, the squad marches
to their respective guide, dress automatically, look to the front and
stand in Vishram.
Falling Out
23. “Line Tor” (Agli/Madhya/Pichli Line) (Falling out of lines). The

drill is carried out as follows:-
(a) At the order “Agli Line – Line Tor” the whole line is to come to
“Savdhan”, take one-step forward, turn right or left (depending
upon the person ordering is on the right or left) and double
away.
(b) At the order “Madhya Line – Line Tor” the whole “Madhya
Line” is to come to “Savdhan”, take a pace to the right with the
right foot, then take two paces with the left foot then the right
foot through the openings in the “Agli Line”, turn right or left
(depending upon the person ordering is on the right or left)
and double away.
(c) At the order “Pichli Line – Line Tor”,, the whole line is to come
to “Savdhan”, take a step to the rear with the left foot, turn
right or left (depending upon the person ordering is on the
right or left) and double away.
(d) At the order “Squad – Line Tor”, the whole squad turns right
and breaks off counting a regulation pause.
24. “Line Tor” (Agli/ Madhya/ Pichli Line Se) (Individual Falling
out). Each individual who has been called out with spring to
“Savdhan” acknowledge “Jee Shriman” and fall out from his/her line
performing the drill depending upon his/her position in the line.
Dismissal
25. “Visarjan” (Dismiss). This order is given to dismiss / break off the
platoon. At this order all person in a squad turn to right, dwell a
pause of two marching paces and break off quietly. This order
should never be given on parade ground/ drill shed.
Difference between Falling out and Dismissal
26. The difference between “Lien Tor” and “Visarjan” is as follows:-
Ser Line Tor Visarjan
(a) To leave the ranks A word of command for closing

temporarily drill
(b) To close drill temporarily Denotes parade completely

when squad is required to termianted
fall in after a stipulated
period
SECTION 5
MARCHING
27. Marching Speed. The number of steps per minute to be taken

while marching or side stepping are as follows:-
Order Marching Speed (steps / Minute)
(a) “Tej Chal” 120
(b) “Daur ke Chal” 180
(c) “Dhire Chal” 65 (75 by Funeral Gun carriage)
(d) “Side Steps” 116

28. Length of Pace. The standard length of pace while marching is to
be as follows:-
Order Length of Pace (Inches)
(a) “Tej Chal” and “Dhire Chal” 30
(b) “Daur Ke Chal” 40
(c) “Dahine (or Bayen Chal” 12
(d) Initial stepping out 20
(e) “Lambe Kadam” 33
(f) “Chota Kadam” 21
(g) Falling out from Madhya line As required (to clear from Agli line)
29. “Tej Chal” (Quick March). On this order step out with the left foot
taking a pace of 20 inches with swinging arms, so that the left foot
heel digging the ground, toe pointing upward, knees straight,
stomach in and chest out. Swing right hand straight to the front up
to a level in line with shoulder and left hand fully to the rear, fingers
of both hands fully clenched and thumb along. Take another step
with right foot so that heel digging the ground toe pointing upward,
left arm fully to the forward, right hand fully to the rear and continue
marching swinging both arms and progressively increasing the
length of pace of 30 inches, taking 120 steps per minute. The
following points should be followed:-
********** Picture of page No.40
(a) While marching the head must be evenly balanced on the

neck and the body should be erect without strain.
(b) The weight of the body is to be balanced on both legs.
(c) The arms should be swung from as far in rear of the body as
possible to straight forward up to the level of shoulders
without straining the shoulders.
(d) The arms should be swung from the shoulder, the wrist and
elbow being kept straight, without undue stiffness.
(e) The foot should be carried straight to the front, and without
being drawn back, placed firmly upon the ground, heel first,
with knees straight without jerking the body.
(f) While marching in formation/ Parades/ platoon, every person

must take a reference point straight to his/ her front at some
distance so as to march in a straight line.
30. “Dhire chal” (Slow March). On this order step out with the left foot
so that toe pointing downwards, heel raised, left foot heel in line
with right foot toe. Both hands well closed to the side. Place the left
foot on the ground with the extension of 20 inches and at the same
time bring right foot heel in line with the left foot toe in similar
manner. Thereafter, continue slow march increasing the length of
pace to 30 inches progressively, taking 65 steps per minute.
31. “Daur Ke Chal” (Double March). On this order Step out with the
left foot on the ground with the length of pace 40 inches and at
same time raise the right foot so that the thigh is parallel to the
ground, toe pointing downwards and heel raised. Simultaneously,
bend both arms from elbow at an angle of 90 degrees, right arm
forward and left arm to the rear and continue “Daur Ke Chal” taking
180 steps per minute, alternating movements of arms with opposite
leg.
32. “Tham” (Tej Chal/ Dhire Chal Se) (halt from Quick/ Slow
March). The order “Tham” will be given on two successive beats of
the right foot. As soon as the order completes on right foot, take
check step with left foot. Thereafter, bring the right foot heel in line
with left foot heel and assume the position of “Savdhan” performing
the drill in two movements.
33. “Tham” (Daur Ke Chal Se) (Halt from Double March). This order
is given on two successive beats of the right foot. As soon as the
order completes on right foot take three check steps commencing
with left foot (left, right and left). With fourth movement bring the
right foot heel in line with left foot heel and assume the position of
“Savdhan” performing the drill in four movements.
SECTION 6
TURNING ON THE MARCH AND WHEELING
“Dahine Mud” (Tej Chal Mein)
34. This order is given on two successive beats of the right foot and
performed in three movements as follows:-
(a) Ek. Take a check step with the left foot, heel digging the
ground, toe pointing upwards, right hand forward and left
hand to rear, Knees and arms must be straight without strain
and bend.
(b) Do. Turn 90 degrees to right with the help of left foot such
that right foot heel digging the ground, toe pointing upwards,
left hand forward and right hand to rear.
(c) Teen. Step out with the left foot and continue “Tej Chal” with
swinging arms.
Notes.
(d) For “Tej Chal me Bayen Mud”. The order must be given on
two successive beats of the left foot and the drill is to be
carried out similarly as above commencing with the right
foot.
(e) While turning right (or left), the pace is not to be checked
and balance should not be lost.
35. “Dahine (or Bayen) Ghum”. The right (or left) leading person
moves round a quarter of circumference of a circle having a radius
of four feet. The other person or file(s) follow in succession
maintaining the dressing while wheeling, with outer files taking
longer steps and inner files taking shorter steps.
SECTION 7
SALUTING ON THE MARCH
36. Dahine Salute. An officer or a sailor, in command of the platoon

gives this order on two successive beats of the right foot, while
passing a superior officer. The whole platoon turns their head and
eyes to the right as the left foot comes on the ground with
simultaneous salute. However, the elbow of the right hand must be
pressed to the rear squarely so that the senior officer being saluted
can be looked at with the right eye without any hindrance. After six
marching paces, cut the salute, simultaneously turn head and eyes
to the front and continue march past. The common fault observed
in this drill is that personnel turn their head and eyes to the right
and salute without pressing their right elbow to the rear thus blocing
the right eye.
37. “Bayen Salute”. The drill for this order is as explained in the Para
above except that personnel turn their head and eyes to the left
with simultaneous salute.
Saluting other than the Hand
38. “Dahine (or Bayen) Dekh”. This order is given by a platoon

commander (an officer or a sailor) on two successive beats of right
foot during ceremonial Divisions/ Parades while marching past the
dais. At this order except (or left) hand file, all others turn their head
and eyes to the right (or left) as the right (or left) foot comes on the
ground looking into the eyes of the VIP and continue marching past
the dais. The platoon commander will do “Dahine (or Bayen)
Salute”.
39. “Samne Dekh”. This order cancels the “Dahine (or Bayen) Dekh”
order previously given. At this order all personnel turn their head
and eyes to the front, platoon commander cuts the salute and
continue marching.
CHAPTER IV
WEAPON TRAINING
SECTION1
CHARACTERISTICS OF .22 RIFLE / RIFLE AMMUNITION
AND IT’S FIRE POWER
1. Introduction. Shooting at the ranges helps an individual to master

this as a sport and also to learn handling of a weapon for self
protection.
2. Characteristics. The major characteristics of Rifle .22 NO MK-II,

MK-IV and Deluxe BA are:-
Ser Details Rifle .22 NO II Rifle .22 Deluxe BA
MK IV BA
(a) Length 45” 43”
(b) Weight 8 Lbs 101/2 OZ 6 LBs 2 OZ
(c) Magazine Capacity 10 Rounds 05 Rounds
(d) Muzzle Velocity 2700 per sec 2700 per sec
(e) Grooves in the barrel 06 06
(f) Effective Range 25 yds 25 yds
(g) Max Range 1700 yds at 33 angle 1700 yds at 33 angle
(h) Calibre .22 .22
(i) Ammunition .22 .22
(j) Rate of fire:-
(i) Normal 05 rds pm 05 rds pm
(ii) Rapid 10 – 15 rds pm 10 – 15 rds pm
3. Safety Precautions. These entail:-
(a) Pushing forward the safety catch, raising and drawing back the
bolt knob and then, examining the chamber and the magazine.
When satisfied that both are clear, push the bolt knob forward
and then down, press the trigger and apply the safety catch.
(b) Inspect the drill cartridges and ensure that there is no live
ammunition.
SECTION 2
STRIPING, ASSEMBLING, CARE AND
CLEANING AND SIGHT SETTING
4. Stripping. Before stripping, check that the number on the left side
of the body corresponds with the number on the back side of the
lever of the bolt. The removal is done in the following sequence:-
(a) Removal of the bolt is done by raising the leaf back sight and
pushing forward the safety catch. Keep the left hand under the
magazine with the middle finger on the restraining catch.
Withdraw the bolt to the rear, turn bolt head upwards and fold
back the back sight.
(b) Press the magazine catch upwards and withdraw the magazine.
************** Picture of page No. 45
5. Assembling. The assembling of the rifle is always done in the

reverse order. Check the magazine and ensure that the magazine
is the same as that of the rifle. Insert the magazine at its place and
press it. While assembling the bolt of Deluxe .22 Rifle ensure that –
(a) Bolt head is fully tight.
(b) Bolt head, guide, rib, cocking piece and steel lug are in a line.
(c) Number of the bold should tally with that of the rifle.
(d) Safety catch should be applied.

*********************** Picture of page No. 46
6. Insert the bolt by holding bolt lever with right hand and rifle with the
left. Push forward the bolt until it touches in the charger guide and
turn the bolt head towards right till the click sound is heard. Now
push forward and press the trigger and apply the safety catch.
*********************** Picture of page No. 46
7. Sight Setting. Set the sight by pressing the thumb spring (Range
increasing towards the muzzle side-adjust the thumb spring
accordingly).
***************** Picture of page No. 47
8. Care and Cleaning. Strip the Rifle, open the butt trap and remove
the pull through and the oil bottle for cleaning. The pull through has
three loops, nearest the weight is for the gauze, the centre for
cleaning the barrel with flannelette and the end one for oiling the
barrel and for use of the armourer.
Use of Pull - Through
9. (a) Remove the bolt from the rifle and drop the weight.
(b) Pull the cord from muzzle until the flannelette is right in the
chamber.
(c) Rest the rifle with the toe of the butt resting on the ground and
press the cord at the muzzle end with the help of the left thumb.
(d) Wrap the cord around the weight and hold the rifle with the left
hand placing the right portion of the palm slightly above the centre
of the bore.
(e) Pull the pull – through straight through the bore in one
continuous motion; care being taken not to allow the cord to touch
the sides of the muzzle to obviate codwear which impairs the
shooting qualities of the weapon.
10. The barrel is cleaned with a patch of flannelette measuring 4” x 2”.

The same is used with chamber stick for cleaning the chamber.
SECTION 3
LOADING, COCKING AND UNLOADING
11. Introduction. In action the solders life may depend as much upon
the rapid loading of rifle as upon the accuracy of his shooting. This
underlines the importance of swiftness in bolt manipulation. The
bolt ought to be properly lubricated.
12. Ammunition Loading and Unloading. No charger is provided for

Deluxe rifle. The ammunition is loaded one by one in the magazine.
Ensure that the ammunition is cleaned before firing. Loading must
be carried out on orders and no action will be taken without proper
orders. It must be carried out clearly and in a set sequence.
Fumbling and lack of determination would lead to jamming and
delay.
13. Loading and Unloading in the Lying Position.
(a) To lie down, take a long pace forward with the left foot and at
the same time pass the rifle into left hand, grasping it at the
point of balance. Place the right hand on to the ground in line
with the left foot. During this movement push the rifle forward
and lower to the ground. The left arm will now be extended to
the front. The legs will be well apart. Now load the rifle as
taught.
(b) Unload the rifle without further orders. Place the right hand on
the ground below the right shoulder. Draw up the left hand.
Stand up as quickly as possible.
SECTION 4
THE LYING POSITION AND HOLD
14. General. Lying position is the most comfortable position from which
to fire. The three basic essential of good shooting are:-
(a) Position must be comfortable and hold so firm that the rifles
gains rock like steadiness.
(b) The firer must aim correctly.
(c) The trigger be pressed in such a way that aim is not disturbed.
Position and Hold
15. To get a stable position, the firer should get a feeling if rooted to the
ground with:-
(a) Legs opened wide apart and body slanting to the left from the
line of the target.
(b) Formation of the two triangles:-
(i) Horizontal triangle formed by the three points where the

chest leaves the ground, the left elbow and the right elbow.
**************** Picture of Page No. 49
(ii) Vertical triangle as viewed form the front of firer the two of its
sides are formed by the forearms, the base being the ground
between elbows. In addition as a quick check, the shoulders
should be level.’
***************** Picture of Page No. 49

16. The Right Hand. Bedded in as per the built of the firer, a firm grip
providing steadiness and should be well forward to allow the
forefinger between the first and second point to the actually on the
trigger. The right hand must pull back the rifle very firmly in the
shoulder and lock it there. The forefinger must take the first
pressure on the trigger, whenever the butt is brought in to the
shoulder.
17. The Left Hand. Acts as support to the forward part of the rifle there
by helping to steady the rifle into the shoulder. The rifle should be
held as far forward as possible, well clear of the magazine. No
attempt to force the left wrist under the rifle should be made.
*********** Picture of Page No.50
18. The Shoulder. The butt plate should be bedded into the shoulder.
Improper bedding in will result in sore shoulder and possible
flinching. The butt plate should meet the shoulder on the interior
pad of the shoulder muscle joint and not in the ‘Hallow’ of it.
19. Position of the Head. The weight of the head should press the
chin downwards and to the right against the butt. The head should
be at such a distance that neither the cocking piece nor the finger,
knock the face during firing.
20. Breathing. Aim correctly and then hold breath while pressing the
trigger.
SECTION 5
AIMING, RANGE AND TARGETS
21. General. Accuracy of the aim is essential for the successful shot.
This is by far the most difficult operation, as the eye has certain
limitations and there are influences affecting what it does.
Nevertheless good shooting can only be obtained with consistency
of aim. Normally 25 yds range is used for Deluxe .22 Rifle.
22. Aiming. The laws of aiming are:-
(a) Focus the target so that a clear picture is formed on the retina of
the eye and get the true centre of the target. Then with the eye
focus to the foresight.
(b) Hold the rifle properly as has already been taught and keep it
upright.
(c) Close the left eye and focus the foresight.
(d) See the foresight through the black sight ‘U’. The foresight
should be seen right in the centre of the U. The trip of the
foresight must be aligned in the centre and in level with the
shoulder of the U.
************* Picture of page No. 51
23. Elevation is given to counter the force of gravity, while the bullet is
in flight. The elevation depends upon the range of the target. This
elevation is given automatically by adjusting the back sight.
Targets
24. The following targets are generally used by girl Cadets:-
(a) For application firing 1’ x 1’ target is used. The aim is to be taken at

the bull which is the black, centre most circle.
(b) For grouping, 1’ x 1’ target with a white patch in the centre of the
bull is used.
(c) For rapid firing, 6 inches figure target is used. The aim is taken at
the centre of the figure.
***************** Picture of page No. 52

SECTION 6
TRIGGER CONTROL AND FIRING A SHOT
Trigger Control
25. The third essential for accurate shooting is trigger operation without
distributing the aim. To achieve this, perfect co-ordination between
eye, brain and operation of the forefinger on the trigger is required.
To develop this co-ordination the exercises explained in the
succeeding paragraphs have been designed.
26. Trigger Operation Ex No 1.
(a) Object. To practice independent action of the index finger.
(b) Method. With the exception of the index finger, the right hand
grips the left wrist as firmly as possible until the white is visible
under the nail tips. The right index finger then press slightly on
the wrist, on which action there must not be any increase in
pressure from any part of the hand. Avoid wearing wrist watches
during the exercise.
27. Trigger Operation Ex No 2.
(a) Object. To practice further muscular control of the hand.
(b) Method. For this hold the right knee clinched with the right hand
less the index finger, held away in a hooked position as through
round trigger. The index finger is made to move through an arc,
as if pressing the trigger. The only movement should be form
the middle joint of the index finger to its tip.
28. Exercise No 3.
(a) Object. To develop co-ordination between the right eye, brain

and right hand index finger and practice muscular control of the
hand.
(b) Method. For this assume lying position and cock the rifle. The
left hand leaves the rifle and supports the head. The left eye is
closed. (If the firer cannot close her left eye, she blankets it out
with the left hand). The right eye takes a line of vision, eye-
foresight any object on the ground in front of the line of vision
when the brain impulse ‘on aim’ is transmitted by the eye; the
index finger instantaneously presses the trigger.
29. Exercise No 4.
(a) Object. To introduce an element of ‘holding’ and the co-

ordination between right eye, brain and right index finger.
(b) Method. The exercise is the same as NO 2 with slight

difference. Hold the rifle with both the hands and take the aim
on the target. Now the important thing is restraining the
breathing. (This has been already dealt with under ‘Holding’).
During this exercise there should not be any round in the
chamber.
30. Exercise No 5.
(a) Object. To introduce an element of ‘holding’ and the co-

ordination between right eye, brain and right index finger.
(b) Method. As for Exercise 3, with the important addition of right

hand holding. Hold rifle steady and no quiver whatsoever being
allowed. (When the firer attempts this exercise he must bring in
the important item of restraining the breathing. This has already
been dealt with under ‘holding’). During its performance no
discernible movement of the rifle whatsoever is to take place.
Magazines must be removed to practice this exercise. When
the young firer performs this exercise by getting two or three
totally correct performances quickly he is a potential marksman.
Firing a Shot
31. Determination. Accurate shooting is never achieved without

concentration, each time a shot is fired the firer must be fully
determined that it is going to be perfect one.
32. Turning the Shot. From the time correct holding is achieved, more
than five seconds should not be taken to fire a shot. Dwelling on the
aim cause the eye and muscles to fire and results in bad shooting.
33. Action on Range Being Ordered. When the ‘range’ is given the
firer should adjust his sights and wait for indication of the target.
Sequence of Firing a Shot
34. Aiming Position. On coming into the aim, the firer must take the
first pressure.
35. breathing. Just before taking an aim, breathing must be gently

restrained. It is important to coordinate so that when the foresight
comes to the point of aim, the breath is partially exhaled.
36. Firing. Immediately on ‘correct aim’ the second pressure will be

taken and shot fired. For a second or two after firing, there should
be no relaxation of the hold or movement of trigger finger or head.
37. Follow Through. The hold and aim must be maintained until the
bullet has left the barrel. Better still fire should allow through until
the bullet has reached the target.
38. Declaration. The firer declares if the aim at the time of firing is not
correct e.g. left, right, high or low. A correct shot should not be
declared.
39. Re-loading in the Shoulder. Immediately after follow through or

declaration, reloading at the shoulder should be carried out.
40. Re-alignment. Having reloaded the firer should realign his sights
approximately on the target.
41. Limber-Up. Before firing any practice, it is advisable to carry out

trigger operation exercise NO 5 and sequence of action for firing a
shot. This is termed as ‘Limber-Up and its aim is to assist in
coordination and tuning up of muscles, eye and brain.
SECTION 7
RANGE PROCEDURE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
42. Use of Red Flags. No firing will take place until all the red flags are
hoisted and look-out men posted as per the range standing orders.
One flag will always be on the top of the butt. Flags are a warning
that the range is in use. A red flag displayed on the butt indicates
that no firing should take place.
43. Suspension of Firing, If firing is suspected during the practice,

owing to some unforeseen happening, weapons will be placed on
the ground and the firer will stand clear.
Inspection of Weapons
44. The Officer – in – Charge (OIC) of the firing point is responsible to

ensure that all weapons are cleared and inspected before leaving
the firing point. A further inspection will be carried out at the
conclusion of firing.
45. During inspection, loading, and unloading, all the rifles must point
towards the target. On the command ‘Nirikshan Ke Lie Janch
Shastra’ (Examine Arms) rifles will be parallel to the ground and
pointing in the directions of the target.
46. No one will go to the targets until all weapons have been unloaded,
inspected and permission top go has been given by the officer in
charge. Only the target papers will be brought back to see the
results.
47. Only firers, coaches, the firing point officer and his assistants are
allowed on the firing point. Waiting details must be at least 10 yds
from the firing point or in the shelter provided.
Range discipline and Conduct of Practices
48. The following is the normal procedure on the firing points:-
(a) The party to fire is brought within about 100 yds of the firing
points.
(b) The practices to be fired are explained.
(c) Firers are detailed to targets.

(d) The coaches, ammunition party and look – outs take positions.
(e) The first two details only form up behind their targets.
(f) On the order of ‘Age Barh’ (Detail Advance) the first detail will
take position on the firing point.
(g) On the lowering of the red flag at the butt, the officer
supervising the firing point may order his red flag to be taken
down and give the order of ‘Detail Advance’. The coaches
check up their positions and correct them if needed, and give
the word of command ‘Limber Up’. On this, the firers must align
rifles as they have been taught. The officer will then give the
order to load and carry on.
(h) The firing will start only after getting orders from OIC firing.
(i) On completion of fire, the firers must raise their right hand up,
keeping the elbow on the ground.
(j) Officer-in-charge will give the word of command ‘Khali Kar’

(before this he must ensure that all have finished). On this the
firers will take their rifles onto their shoulders and move the bolt
twice, press the trigger and stand up.
(k) The Officer-in-charge will give the Command ‘Detail Report’ on

this the firers would report ‘Number ek rifle theek, do theek,
teen theek and number char rifle theek’. The report will be form
left to right. (Normally four targets are used on a Miniature
Range).
(l) The first and last firer will say ‘Number ek rifle theek’ and the
rest will say ‘Do theek’, ‘Teen theek’ and so on.
(m) The details are changed by word of command and the new
detail which has been waiting comes up while another detail
forms up behind.
(n) Before the firers leave the range they will have a further
weapon inspection. Each firer will be asked whether he has any
live ammunition. It will be ensured that they have no live
ammunition.
Miniature Ranges
49. Only .22 ammunition will be used on Miniature Ranges. Scoring will
be similar to that as laid down for classification ranges.
Practice Tgt Range in Instruction Scoring
Yards
Deliberate 1 Ft 25 (a) Position Bull & Inner
Lying Points -3
Suported Magpie - 2 Points
Outer - 1 Points
(b) One HPS - 15 Points

Practice of
5 rounds
CHAPTER V
LEADERSHIP
SECTION 1
MOTIVATION, DISCIPLINE, DUTIES OF A GOOD CITIZEN
LEADERSHIP TRAITS
1. Motivation is a process by which one is inspired to act in the

desired manner with the help of catalytic persuasion. It is the
application of will power. Motivation causes individuals and groups
to achieve a goal or take action under given circumstances.
2. The factors that affect motivation vary in nature from physical to

physiological. At the higher level are the national characteristics of
the nation, his confidence in his nation, government, commanders
and orders. At the personal level it will be his attitude to the basic
biological needs and urges, personal relationship, the type and
extent and importance the person attaches to political and religious
ideologies. In the military sphere, it will also depend on the duration
of the war, leave and rotation policy, causality rates, welfare
arrangements for loved ones and a feeling of satisfaction over
services employment and so on.
3. Discipline. Discipline welds together the qualities of courage,

endurance, alertness and comradeship. Discipline teaches self
control and correct behavior at all times. Courage, endurance and
even loyalty will not suffice in the real crisis, only discipline will pull
subordinates through.
4. Duty. Duty may be defined as a moral/legal obligation and a

binding force of what is right and behavior towards superior
colleagues and subordinates. Duty and Obligation refer to
something a person feels bound to do. A duty often applies to what
a person performs in fulfillment of the permanent dictates of
conscience, piety, right or law. Eg, it is one’s duty to tell the truth or
it is a parents’ duty to raise the children properly. An obligation is
what is expected at a particular time in fulfillment of a specific and
often personal promise, contract, or agreement social or financial
obligations.
5. Duties of a Good Citizen.
(a) It is the duty of every citizen to abide by the constitution and

respect its ideals and Institutions.
(b) To cherish and follow the ideas that inspired our freedom
struggle.
(c) To uphold the sovereignty, unity and integrity of India.
(d) To render national service when called for.
(e) To develop scientific temper, humanism, and the spirit of

enquiry and reforms.
(f) To promote harmony and the spirit of common brotherhood and

renounce practices derogatory to the dignity of women.
(g) To protect and improve the natural environment including

forests, lakes and wildlife and have compassion for living
creatures.
(h) To strive towards excellence in all spheres of individual and

collective activity so that the nation constantly rises to her levels
of endeavor and achievements.
(i) To take care of and protect Government property.
Leadership Traits
6. A leader is one who by virtue of his having certain characteristics,

more pronounced than others, adopts the role of guiding the group
engaged in a certain task. Successful leaders have some
characteristics, in born as well as developed by their experience,
such as integrity, moral courage, confidence, correct judgment and
a highly developed sense of responsibility. These distinguished
qualities or traits, if demonstrated in daily activities, help the leader
to earn the respect of his subordinates.
7. Traits of Leadership.
(a) Alertness. Alertness of the mind helps a leader pick up the

opportunities at the right time and exploit the situation to his own
advantage.
(b) Bearing. Bearing implies creation of favorable impression,

upright carriage and appearance that depicts competence and
confidence.
(c) Courage. The ability of a person to accept responsibility and act
correctly in threatening situation with calmness and firmness.
(d) Decisiveness. The ability to make decisions promptly after

weighing the pros and cons.
(e) Dependability. To be ready with a solution whenever the

problem arises.
(f) Endurance. The ability to withstand pain, fatigue, stress and

hardship. Be able to stick to a job and see it to completion.
(g) Enthusiasm. Display of sincere interest and zeal in

performance of duties and work with an optimistic and cheerful
attitude.
(h) Initiative. To step forward and shoulder responsibility even in

absence of any orders to do so.
(i) Integritiy. Uprightness of character, soundness of moral

principles, quality of absolute truthfulness and honesty.
(j) Judgement. Quality to weigh facts and possible solutions on

which to base sound decisions.
(k) Justice. Quality to be impartial in rendering reward or

punishment.
(l) Knowledge. A leader must know more than the men he

commands.
(m)Loyalty. Faithfulness to country, superiors, colleagues and

subordinates.
(n) Sense of Humour. The ability to remain cheerful under stress.
(o) Tact. Ability to deal with other people’s nature without offending
them and having consideration for their feelings.
(p) Unselfishness. Place service before self. Share the comforts

with subordinates.
SECTION 2
PERSONALITY / CHARACTER DEVELOPMENT
8. Measures to Develop the Personality. Some of the important

qualities which help an individual to develop the personality are as
follows:-
(a) By trying to understand the point of view of others by

empathizing.
(b) Be cheerful and nice.
(c) Be sincere and trustworthy.
(d) Provide compelling ideas.
(e) Have a sense of conviction.
(f) Have a positive attitude.
(g) Develop leadership skills.
(h) Develop communication skills.
9. Measures to Develop the Character. Some of the leadership

traits can help an individual to improve character. They are:-
(a) Courage.
(b) Decisiveness.
(c) Initiative.
(d) Enthusiasm.
(e) Loyalty.
(f) Justice.
(g) Morality.
(h) Sense of duty.
(i) Patriotism.
10.Role of NCC in Personality / Character Development. NCC plays
an important role in personality / character development of the
cadets. NCC helps in developing the overall personality of cadets
through various activities listed below:-
(a) Drill. It helps in improving the posture of cadets and improves

their bearing and physical fitness.
(b) Interaction of Cadets in Camps. NCC cadets get the

opportunity to interact with cadets from different parts of the
country and the world and help them understand various
cultures and traditions. This exposure gives them better
understanding of other people and broadens their horizon to
accept others and co-exist with these differences.
(c) Competitions. The various competitions in camps develop

sportsmanship and team spirit and encourage the cadets to try
to compete to win.
(d) Sports and Adventure Activities. Sports teach the cadets the
virtues of comradeship, healthy competition, courage to face
challenges, art of leadership, team work etc. Sports and
adventure activities improve the mental toughness and
temperament of cadets to help them goals beyond their
capability.
CHAPTER VI
CIVIL AFFAIRS
SECTION 1
CIVIL DEFENCE ORGANIZATION AND ITS DUTIES
1. Introduction. The aim of a war is to force the national will on the

enemy. This is achieved by cripping his capacity to withstand war,
by demoralizing the population, destruction of production potential
and by disrupting the means of communication. To minimize the
suffering caused by war, it is necessary to take Civil Defence
measures. It is a measure adopted by the civilian population,
government, local self government bodies and the voluntary
organizations etc. during the war to minimize the effects of enemy
action on men and material. In short, it is the defence of the citizen
by a citizen.
2. Aim of Civil Defence. Civil Defence aims at saving life,

maintaining continuity of production and minimizing damage to
property in the event of hostile attacks. It also seeks to maintain
morale of the people in disastrous situations. Members of the Civil
Defence Corps also render assistance during natural calamities like
flood and earthquakes on a voluntary basis.
Organization
3. In a district, District Magistrate (DM) is the controller of Civil

Defence (CD). He is responsible for implementation of all CD
measures by the district Departmental heads such as the Civil
Surgeon, the Superintendent of Police, the PWD Engineer, and the
Publicity Officer etc. They are appointed by him as in-charges of
various CD services. The DM also constitutes an Advisory
Committee out of the various people possessing qualities of
leadership and discipline who can arouse and sustain public
interest in the CD Services.
4. At local level the various existing agencies are responsible for

organizing suitable C.D. services ego. The Civil Surgeon is put in
charge of casualty services, CD Officer in charge of Supply
Services and so on. The various CD services are as under:-
(a) Headquarters Service. This service works under the control of

CD.
(b) Warden’s Service. It is a link between the public and the
authorities. This service is responsible for organizing self help
parties, files parties and checking light restrictions. It reports
damages and guides the homeless to the Rest Centres.
(c) Fire fighting Services. They detect small fires and put them
out.
(d) Casualty Service. The functions of this service are:-
(i) Rendering first aid on the spot.
(ii) Providing transport to casualties for short distances.
(iii) Sending various casualties for further treatment.
(e) Communication Services. The service is responsible for:-
(i) Receipt and dissemination of air raid warning.
(ii) Provision of coordination and control facilities.
(iii) Provision of communication between warden posts, and

control centers through messengers or telephones etc.
(f) Training Service. This service is responsible to train the

necessary staff in Civil Defence duties.
(g) Rescue Service. Their duty is to rescue the injured personnel,

trapped under the debris.
(h) Welfare Service. It is responsible for:-
(i) To supply information about the missing and the dead.
(ii) To provide shelter, food and clothing.
(iii) To arrange evacuation from vulnerable areas.
(i) Depot and Transport Service. It is this service which is

responsible to send various services to the scene of incident
and provide necessary transport required from time to time.
(j) Salvage Service. It is responsible to salvage any damaged

property and to keep it in safe custody.
(k) Corpse Disposal Service. This service is responsible for
collection, identification and disposal of dead bodies.
(l) Supply Service. This service is responsible for Planning,

Organizing and procuring necessary equipment for CD
Services.
(m)Besides the above noted services the CD organization will have

other services also to meet various other requirements that
arise in the time of war.
5. Home Guards. Home Guards is a voluntary force raised by the

State Government and Union Territory Administrations under a
broad pattern and policy laid down by the Ministry of Home affairs.
It is a country wide organization and its members are drawn from all
walks of life. Besides attending to their normal avocations, the
Home Guards place their services voluntarily at the disposal of the
authorities to assist the civil administration and the community at
large.
SECTION2
TYPES OF EMERGENCIES
6. Emergencies or disasters can be classified as follows:-
(a) Natural Disasters.
(i) Wind Related. Storm, cyclone, tornado, tidal waves.
(ii) Water Related. Flood, cloudburst, flash flood, excessive

rains, drought.
(iii) Earth Related. Earthquake, tsunami, avalanche,

landslide, volcanic eruptions.
(b) Man-made Disasters.
(i) Accidents. Road, rail, air, sea accidents, building

collapse.
(ii) Industrial Mishaps. Gas leak, explosion, sabotage and

safety breach.
(iii) Fire.
(iv) Forest fire.
(v) Contamination / poisoning.
(vi) Terrorist Activities.
(vii) Ecological Disasters. Pollution (air, water, noise), soil

degradation, global warming, toxic wastes and nuclear
accidents.
(viii) Warfare. Conventional, chemical, biological, nuclear.
SECTION 3
PROTECTION
Protection Against Air Attacks
7. Timely warning of approaching enemy aeroplanes affords time for

the people to take shelter and enforce various CD measures. The
effects of bombing by the enemy aircraft can be reduced by training
the public in taking protective measures in the face of enemy threat.
The risk of causality can be reduced by taking adequate cover such
as:-
(a) In the trenches.
(b) In the Open. Lie on the ground with face downwards resting
on elbows with hands behind the head so that the chest is
not in contact with the ground. Put a rolled handkerchief in
between teeth.
(c) In a Vehicle. Park the vehicle in a side lane leaving the

ignition key in its place and take cover in the open.
(d) Inside a Building. Be near the inside wall of the building.

Places below staircases, archways, doorways, corners and
under cots are safer.
(e) In a Train. Turn off the lights and crawl under the seats. On
no account look outside the windows.
(f) In the Cinema. Remain seated on your seats.
(g) In a Bullock Cart or Tonga. Unyoke animals, tie them to

the nearest tree or a pole and take shelter as in the open.
Protection Against Air Bombing
8. Dispersion. Dispersion means reduction of congestion in the area

or likely targets. No habitation should be allowed within a radius of
500 to 1000 yards of Ammunition factories, aerodromes etc.
9. Camouflage and Concealment. It means denial of the likely

targets by camouflaging them artificially. This may be achieved by
painting, creating smoke screens, blacking out or creating false
targets.
10. Shelters for the Public. Shelters for the public and for the families
should be build separately or selected from the available buildings.
Anti Splinter Measures
11. Splinters fly at high speeds and cause grievous injuries. All glass
should be removed and replaced by wooden paneling. Otherwise,
half inch wire netting or plywood screens can be used.
Sand Bagging
12. Doors and windows can be covered by using sand bags to ensure
that splinter doesn’t fly through them and cause injury.
SECTION 4
ESSENTIAL SERVICES AND THEIR MAINTENANCE
13. The term ‘Essential Services’ means any public utility services,
public safety or the maintenance of infrastructure and services
necessary for the life of the community, non-availability of which
would result in the infliction of grave hardship to the country as
such.
14. These essential services are as follows:-
(a) Postal, telegraph or telephone services.
(b) Railways, road, air and sea transport services for the
carriage of passengers or goods.
(c) Running of ports of (b) above.
(d) Provision of water, electricity and sanitation.

(e) Medical services and essential supplies.
(f) Production and supply of essential commodities.
(g) Running of mint and security presses.
15. These services are maintained by Govt. at all cost and there are
very rigid acts and provisions to ensure continuity of these services
because without them life in the country would go out of gear. Very
strict provisions in law exist against personnel going on strike,
refusing to go to work overtime or any other conduct which is likely
to result in cessation or substantial retardation of work in
maintaining these services.
Role of Cadets in Maintenance of Essential Services
16. NCC, students are trained in various subjects like First Aid, Home
Nursing, Signals, Hygiene and Sanitation, Civil Defence, Self
Defence, Weapon Training, Map Reading, Adventure, Social
Service, Leadership, Ecology/Nature Awareness etc. They can help
the local authorities in maintaining the essential services as
follows:-
(a) Maintaining power supply, water supply, man transport.
(b) Darkening the cities and towns, during air-raid.
(c) Provision of shelter, reporting of damages.
(d) Rendering first aid; establish and run First Aid Centers.
(e) Salvage destroyed structures and property.
(f) Manning telephone exchanges, as operators or messengers

etc.
(g) Cadets can boost boost up the morale of the general

population by contradicting various rumours that keep
spreading as a measure of psychological war.
(h) Disposal of dead and carriage of wounded.
(i) Distribution of relief material.

SECTION 5
DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Introduction
17. NCC can play a significant role in the management of the after
effects of natural calamities and disasters. With its organizational
capability, strength and quality of its cadres, involvement of NCC in
disaster relief will provide able assistance to the nation as well as
an avenue to the youth in showing its commitment to the society,
play a significant role in forming correct attitudes, feelings of
sympathy in respect of fellow human beings and also result in
personal growth and improved self image of the cadets.
18. Cadets being young and exuberant can be selectively employed

through correct selection of areas of intervention. Indoctrination and
strict supervision of their activities will ensure success of cadets.
However, it is preferable to determine their areas of activity and
responsibility is any disaster management activity beforehand and
to limit the same to indirect support role, while the direct
intervention is left to experts in the field. Ordinarily, participation
should be restricted to 2nd / 3rd year SD / SW cadets only and
selection of boys and girls should depend on areas and its distance
from their hometowns.
Role of NCC
19. NCC cades can effectively assist the state system in management
which could take shape in the form of:-
(a) Traffic management under supervision.
(b) Search and Rescue.
(c) First aid and evacuation of rescues people.
(d) Helping in setting up and administration of Relief Camps.
(e) Collection, loading and dispatch of medical aid, material,

food and other relief material.
(f) Contuct of cultural and recreational activities for victims

toboost their morale at later / rehabilitation stages.
Points for Consideration
20. NCC is an extra-curricular activity of students and the cadets are

not like embodied soldiers available at all times. Some points for
employment of cadets are as under-
(a) JD / JW cadets are young and may not be considered
suitable for such operations. SW Cadets may be used for
softer jobs like providing medical assistances or manning
exchanges during strikes of nurses or telephone operations.
Only SD Cadets may be found suitable for helping in natural
calamities like earthquakes, land-slides and floods.
(b) Suitable bonds would be required to be obtained from
parents of cadets.
(c) Cadets are never readily available to be mustered at short
notice because they are busy with their studies at schools /
colleges. It is only during camps that the cadets are available
and can be launched at short notice.
(d) Cadets are not adequately trained for specialized tasks
related to disaster management. Suitable training must be
given to them during institutional training.
(e) Adequate allowances would require to be allocated for the
cadets taking part in these activities.
(f) Joint schemes with the state disaster relief machinery would
be required to be made in which NCC cadets may be
incorporated.
(g) Adequate signal equipment and other disaster relief
equipment would be required to be authorized to NCC to
carry out necessary training.
(h) NCC cadets would have to carry out rehearsals along with
Army, police, fire fighting forces and others in the state.
21. A number of international NGOs are active in the area of disaster

preparedness and response. Many national voluntary agencies are
working in various aspects of disaster mitigation, including risk
reduction, preparedness and response. NCC is required to actively
participating in disaster relief management in concerned states.
Therefore, there is a need for emergency relief efforts with each
state government. The objective of such a coordinating body could
be to strengthen the role of NCC in:-
(a) Emergency preparedness.
(b) Emergency response (immediate and in reconstruction

efforts).
(c) Mitigation.
Areas of Collaboration Between Government and NCC Agencies
22. Potential areas identified for collaboration by Government of India

(GOI) in emergency programming, particularly with respect to
preparedness are:-
(a) Conceptual Aspects.
(i) Different vulnerability. Who is affected by a disaster? How

to identify them.
(ii) Participation of community in planning and implementing

relief activities.
(iii) Education and training of affected communities.
(iv) Disaster preparedness cells.
(v) Developing training modules for NCC.
(vi) Long term disaster plans to be linked with development

objectives.
(b) Administrative Aspects
(i) Organizational Capabilities.
(ii) Facilitate coordinated access to donor groups.
(iii) Directory of NCC.
(iv) GOI – NCC forum.
(v) Develop NCC emergency preparedness plans.

(c) Community Training.
(i) Develop staff capabilities.
(ii) Develop NCC emergency preparedness plans.
(d) Community Participation.
(i) Mobilize participation in designing relief activities.
(ii) Mobilize participation in implementing relief activities.
(iii) Train communities in disaster preparedness.
(e) Communications. Improve on-site communications

capacity.
CHAPTER VII
SOCIAL SERVICE
SECTION 1
WEAKER SECTIONS OF OUR SOCIETY AND THEIR NEEDS
1. Introduction. India is still divided into many endogamous groups,

or castes and sub-castes, as a result of centuries of practicing a
form of social hierarchy called the caste system. The traditional
caste system, leads to severe oppression and segregation of the
lower castes and other weaker sections and limits their access to
various freedoms like education and employment. The Indian
constitution prohibits any discrimination based on religion, race,
caste, sex and place of birth. But, while providing equality of
opportunity for all citizens, the constitution also contains special
clauses to ensure reservation, “for the advancement of any socially
and educationally backward classes of citizens or for the Scheduled
Castes and the Scheduled Tribes”.
2. Classes of Society. The weaker section of society comprise of the

following categories:-
(a) Scheduled Caste (SC) and Scheduled Tribes (ST).

Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes are communities that
are accorded special status by the Constitution of India. These
communities were considered “outcastes”. These castes and
tribes have traditionally been relegated to the most menial
labour with little possibility of upward mobility and are subject
to extensive social disadvantage and Discrimination. The
scheduled Caste people are also known as ‘Dalits’ and the
Scheduled Tribes people as ‘Adivasis’, Mahatma Gandhi used
the terms ‘Harijans’ and ‘Girijan’, for Sc and ST respectively.
According to 2001 census, population of SC and ST is
approximately 16% and 8% of India toal population
respectively.
(b) Other Backward Classes (OBCs). These classes are a group

of sub castes which are socially and educationally backward
while still having a higher status than SC and ST. As of 2006,
approximately 2300 communities are listed backwards. Central
and all state Governments are enjoined to ensure their social
and educational development.
3. Needs of Weaker Sections. The general problems are widespread
poverty, unemployment, backwardness, untouchability and lower
status in Society. They suffer discrimination in all walks of life vis-à-
vis the privileged sections of the society. STs are basically nomads
and don’t have any land to settle down or cultivate. OBCs
comprises persons belonging to backward classes of country and
due to backwardness, remoteness or lack of infrastructure and
development, job opportunities are grossly insufficient. These
needs can be fulfilled by providing thee sections with Education,
Employment and Reservation in Educational Institutions and Govt.
Jobs.
SECTION – 2
BASICS OF SOCIAL SERVICE AND ITS NEED
4. The term ‘Social Service’ is defined broadly as the provisions made

be governmental or voluntary efforts to meet income maintenance,
medical care, housing and recreational needs and provisions for
the care and protection of recognized special groups. Social service
characterizes a formalized way of helping people to help
themselves. It is based on the reorganization of variations in
individual capability and variations in the social structure. The
objective is to help the individual to utilize his capability for his own
welfare and for that community.
5. Type of Social Services. The various types of social services

which have been initiated are as under:-
(a) Education.
(b) Family welfare, Medical care, Family planning and nutrition.
(c) Provision of water and cooking fuel, roads, electricity and

sanitation.
(d) Old age support systems.
(e) Employment.
(f) Social assistance, social security and care and protection.
(g) Housing and rehabilitation.
(h) Recreation, sports and social activities.

SECTION 3
NON – GOVERNMENT ORGANIZATIONS AND
THEIR CONTRIBUTION TO THE SOCIETY
6. For the progress and development of the country, there are mainly
two types of organizations viz Government and Non-Government.
7. Government Organizations. The steps taken by the Government

for the overall development of the nation and the society are
included in the charter of duties of our government organization.
The government fully controls such actions which are directly or
indirectly undertaken for such developments.
Non Government Organizations
8. These organizations are controlled by members of society, who

form a group or groups and work towards social welfare and nation
building. People with common objective and aspirations, together
make organizations called Non Government Organizations (NGOs)
and get them registered. An NGO is a non-profit group or
association that acts outside of institutionalized political structures
and pursue matters of interest to its members by lobbying,
persuasion, or direct action. Their goals are primarily non-
commercial. They collect funds both from people and the
government.
9. NGOs first make survey of various problems, collect information

about them, organize various demonstrations, give speeches and
wherever action needs to be taken, they take with full vigor. They
understand social problems, the causes, affects and create
necessary infrastructure to overcome them. NGOs usually gain at
least a portion of their funding from private sources. Major sources
of NGO funding include membership dues, grant from international
institutions or national governments and private donations.
10. Some of the examples of important NGOs are:-
(a) Shri Niketan Yojna started by Ravinder Nath Tagore.
(b) Seva Gram Yojna starte by Mahatma Gandhi.
(c) Gram Yojna started by Vinoba Bhave.

(d) Child Relief and You.
(e) Helping India.
(f) People for Animals (PFA).
(g) Soceity for Prevention of Cruelty to Animals (SPCA).
(h) International Red Cross and Red Crescent Movement are the
world’s largest group of humanitarian NGOs.
11. Contribution / Activities of NGOs. The following activities are

undertaken by NGOs:-
(a) Blood donation.
(b) Adult literacy.
(c) Anti Dowry Drive.
(d) Anti Leprosy Drive.
(e) Anti Drug Drive.
(f) Tree plantation.
(g) Environmental Programs.
(h) Help in natural calamities such as flood, earth-quake.
(i) Educating people about the ill-effects of AIDS and education for
prevention of the same.
(j) Family planning programs.
(k) Community development work.
(l) Promotion of social-equality.
(m)Wildlife and animal care.
(n) Human rights.
(o) Awareness campaign.
(p) Child care.

(q) Polio eradication drive.
(r) Providing schooling facilities especially in remote villages /

areas.
(s) Creating and providing health and hygiene infrastructure and

facilities to reduce diseases and help in creating a healthy and
fit populatin.
(t) Cottage industry.
(u) Orphanage and old age homes.
12. Conclusion. NGOs are the true examples of selfless service and
teamwork. Employees are highly committed to the aims and the
principles of the organization. They share equal contribution with
government organizations and social welfare program. Though
government on its part has introduced a number of programs, it
cannot be entirely successful without the active participation by
each member of society. NGOs provide the necessary platform
towards this end.
SECTION 4
CONTRIBUTION OF YOUTH TOWARDS SOCIAL WELFARE
Introduction
13. Youth constitute the most creative segment of any society. Their
role and contribution are vital to all sections of the societies given
their wide social, cultural and other demographic diversities. Youth
constitute about 34% of the total population of India and their role
and contribution towards social welfare and nation building can not
be ignored.
14. Social welfare is considere4d as including the attempts made by

governments and voluntary organizations to help families and
individuals by maintaining incomes at an acceptable level. This can
be achieved by providing medical care and public health services,
adequate housing and community development, facilitate social
adjustment, facilities for recreation, in addition, pass legislation and
creating facilities to protect against exploitation and to care for the
underprivileged social groups. It also includes subjects relating to
education.
Contribution of Youth towards Social Welfare
15. The youth can contribute towards social welfare in the following
ways:-
(a) Leadership. Youth are the leaders of tomorrow and young and
vibrant youth are essential for future leadership. Support is
provided to voluntary organizations to participate in youth
development programs. Youth need to involve themselves in
activities which will develop creditable leadership.
(b) Community Service. Youth need to work in social welfare
activities and community services. Therefore, community
service has been developed as an integral part of the curriculum
for education, instruction and training of all students enrolled in
educational institution so that youth can fruitfully understand and
contribute in community service.
(c) National and Cultural Integration. The youth when organized
as youth force will contribute for the promotion of national and
cultural integration of the country. Fostering and developing
interaction between youth from different parts of the country
especially the isolated border and tribal areas will help in
achieving national integration. It should be the endeavor of
youth to motivate the general public to work against the
separatist forces and ensure unity of the country is maintained.
(d) Education and Literacy. The youth need to educate
themselves and subsequently get into the process of providing
quality education to all sections of society. They need to
promote education and self development capabilities of the rural
youth especially of girls and youth in backward areas.
(e) Environment. The youth must understand the importance and
implications of environment on the society and the ecological
wealth of the nation. They must help in improving and protecting
the environment. They need to engage in tree plantation
programs and cleaning of rivers and lakes and disposal of
degradable and non degradable waste.
(f) Health care and Family Welfare. They must promote
awareness and involvement in social programs pertaining to
health and family welfare. Programs such as ‘Youth Against
AIDS’ campaign, ‘Pulse Polio’, ‘Small Family’ norm and various
immunization programs should be promoted. They must also
volunteer in manpower intensive programs at the implantation
stage.
(g) Physical Education and Adventure Training. The youth must
understand the importance of physical education for health and
physical fitness with a view to increasing individual productivity
and the value of sports as a means of recreation and with a
potential for promoting social harmony and discipline.
(h) Old Age Care. Our basic social fabric and the joint family
system inherently provide for old age care. However with the
break down of the joint family system the need for old age care
has increased. The youth must contribute to the well being of
the Senior Citizen of the society by taking care of their aged and
proved them financial security and moral self respect and make
all efforts to ensure that they have a secure old age with
adequate housing and health care.
(i) Watershed and Wasteland Development. These two are one

of our major resources which need to be continuously protected
and systematically proclaimed and developed and can be used
for various social welfare activities. Youth has genuine potential
for this nature of work. They must contribute in these programs
and ensure that these areas are protected from unscrupulous
elements that may enter these areas of interests for personal
gains.
SECTION 5
FAMILY PLANNING
Introduction
16. Family planning assumes greater importance today as population

has passed the one billion mark. Rapid growth of population is
straining the available resources. In India resources are already
scarce. There will be scarcity of land, houses and food coupled with
unemployment. This will give rise to crime in the society. There is
an immediate requirement to educate the masses involving
religious, political and intellectual aspects to motivate them to adopt
family planning if we want to see India as the economically and
technologically leading nation in the world.
17. Family planning is defined as the voluntary, responsible decision
made by individual and couples as to the desired family size and
timing of birth. Therefore on the micro level it means children are
born because they are wanted and provided for and on the macro
level it contributes to the betterment of human life.
18. Methods of Family Planning. Family planning methods are

Vasectomy, Tubectomy, conventional contraceptives like condoms
/ diaphragms and oral pills.
19. Measures to Attain Objectives. Effective measures to be

undertaken are:-
(a) Voluntary encouragement of family planning can have positive

health benefits. In small families mother takes more care of
child which is necessary for healthy development.
(b) Stringent laws should be enacted to curb the menace and the
violators severely punished. Couples violating family norms
should be debarred from contesting elections and their voting
rights withdrawn.
(c) Take steps encouraging a two-child norm so that growing

population is controlled.
(d) Educating women particularly in backward and rural areas

should be taken up with complete sincerity which would help in
eradicating this menace.
(e) Early marriage should be strictly checked and rural areas

should be taken up with complete sincerity which would help in
eradicating this menace.
(f) Early marriage should be strictly checked and efforts be made

to raise the living standard and improve literacy rate.
(g) Couples adopting family planning should be given all possible

assistance. In this regard, couples should be made to attend
counseling sessions after marriage in which they should be
made aware of the needs and benefits of family planning.
(h) The problem can also be solved by providing basic health care
facilities especially to the backward classes.
(i) Involvement of religious leaders in the program.

SECTION 6
CAUSES AND PREVENTION OF HIV / AIDS
20. Although HIV and AIDS are often used synonymously, they are
different. HIV (Human Immuno-deficiency Virus) is a virus that
gradually destroys the body’s immune system. AIDS (Acquired
Immuno Deficiency Syndrome) is a condition wherein various
diseases affect the body because of the body’s weak natural
defence mechanism – the immunity. AIDS stands for:-
(a) Acquired (not inborn, but passed from mother to baby).
(b) Immune (relating to the body’s immune system, which provides

protection from disease causing bacteria/viruses/fungi).
(c) Deficiency (lack of response by the immune system to bacteria /

viruses/fungi/cancer cells).
(d) Syndrome (a number of signs and symptoms indicating a

particular disease or condition).
21. Therefore AIDS is an acquired condition in which a person may

have various diseases that cause similar symptoms, all of which
are due to the body’s diminished ability to fight diseases. Anyone
who has HIV infection will develop AIDS over a period of time.
22. Causes of HIV/AIDS. HIV is present in all body fluids of an infected

person and is more in number in blood, semen and vaginal fluids.
HIV infection normally spreads when there is contact with these
body fluids through four main routes:-
(a) Sexual transmission.
(b) Blood transfusion.
(c) Sharing needles and syringes for intravenous drug use.
(d) Mother-to-child transmission during pregnancy, delivery or

breastfeeding.
23. Prevention of HIV/AIDS. HIV / AIDS can be prevented in the
following four main ways:
(a) Being in a mutually faithful sexual relationship. If this is not

possible, then correct and consistent use of condoms for every
sexual act, irrespective of the type of sex is essential.
(b) Checking all the blood and blood products for HIV infection
before transfusion.
(c) Avoiding drug abuse, especially sharing needles and syringes

for injecting drugs.
(d) Reducing the risk of mother-to-child transmission by following

recommended guidelines for preventing parent to child
transmission of HIV infection.
Contribution of Youth towards Prevention of AIDS
24. The youth have an important role to play in prevention of HIV/AIDS.

They need to be actively engaged not just in spreading awareness
about HIV, but also in promoting responsible behaviors, especially
those related to sexual practices.
25. Youth should educate general public by spreading the information

that HIV can not be transmitted by the following modes:-
(a) Shaking Hands.
(b) Sharing of Clothes.
(c) Sharing of food and Utensils.
(d) Sharing of Toilets.
(e) Insect Bites.
(f) Hugging or Kissing.
(g) Working in the same office or traveling in the same vehicle.
(h) Playing or swimming with the infected person.

SECTION 7
CANCER – CAUSES AND PREVENTION
26. Introduction. Six million worldwide die of cancer every year. The
present rapid growth rate of cancer is required to be controlled or
retarded to prevent an epidemic-like situation in India. If growth of
cancer is not controlled, it may lead to a ‘National Crisis’. Sixty
percent cancer cases are preventable and it is curable if detected
and treated in time. Experts strongly feel that improved level of
cancer awareness to the masses will help prevention of cancer
considerably. NCC as a disciplined organization with assistance
and co-operation of NGOs can play a vital role by educating
masses on cancer awareness. There are billions of cells in the
human body. Normally they grow in a well-regulated pattern. But
when cancer sets in, a group of cells, suddenly starts multiplying
and forms a tumor or lump. As the tissue progresses in the degree
of malignancy, it invades the original site where it has occurred and
through blood vessels or lymphatic channels can reach distant
parts of the body.
27. Types of Cancer. Different types of cancer that men and women
suffer are:-
(a) Oral cancer.
(b) Larynx cancer.
(c) Lung cancer.
(d) Cervical cancer.
(e) Breast cancer.
(f) Prostate cancer.
(g) Colon cancer.
28. Causes of Cancer. The main causes of cancer are:-
(a) Prolonged chewing of tobacco, zarda, pan and pan masala.
(b) Heavy smoking.
(c) Excessive drinking.

(d) Poor oral hygiene and inadequate dental care.
(e) Air and water pollution.
(f) Deficiency of balanced diet.
29. Prevention of Cancer. Endeavor should be made to prevent

cancer from ever occurring by:-
(a) Avoid smoking.
(b) Avoiding tobacco in any form.
(c) Good oral hygiene.
(d) Avoiding diet high in processed and preserved meat, smoked

and salted food.
(e) Avoiding obesity.
(f) Handling asbestos and certain dyes with precaution.
(g) Early treatment on detection.
30. Conclusion. Cancer is not a contagious disease. There is a life

after cancer. Sixty percent of the cancers can be prevented through
life style changes, diet, exercise, weight control, alcohol in
moderation and non consumption of tobacco in any form. More
than eighty percent cancer is completely curable if detected and
treated early. We must not get scared of cancer but must fight
cancer with full sincerity.
CHAPTER VIII
HEALTH AND HYGIENE
SECTION 1
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF THE HUMAN BODY
1. The human body is the greatest of all complex machineries. It

operates through systems that are summarized below.
Skeletal System
2. The human skeleton consists of 206 bones bound together by

tough and relatively inelastic connective tissues called ligaments.
The different parts of the body vary greatly in their degree of
movement. Thus, the arm at the shoulder is freely movable,
whereas the knee joint is definitely limited to a hinge-like action.
The movements of individual vertebrae are extremely limited, the
bones composing the skull are immovable. Movements of the
bones of the skeleton are effected by contractions of the skeletal
muscles, to which the bones are attached by tendons. These
muscular contractions are controlled by the nervous system.
Nervous System
3. The nervous system is composed of the Central Nervous System

and the Peripheral Nervous System. The Central Nervous System,
which includes the brain and spinal cord, processes and
coordinates all incoming sensory information and outgoing motor
commands, and it is also the seat of complex brain functions such
as memory, intelligence, learning, and emotion. The Peripheral
Nervous System includes all neural tissue outside of the central
nervous system. It is responsible for providing sensory, or afferent,
information to the central nervous system and carrying motor, or
efferent, commands out to the body’s tissues.
4. Voluntary motor commands, such as moving muscles to walk or

talk, are controlled by the Somatic Nervous System, while
involuntary motor commands, such as digestion and heart beat, are
controlled by the Autonomic Nervous System.
Circulatory System
5. In passing through the system, blood pumped by the heart follows a

winding course through the right chambers of the heart, into the
lungs, where it picks up oxygen, and back into the left chambers of
the heart. From these it is pumped into the main artery, the aorta,
which branches into increasingly smaller arteries until it passes
through the smallest, known as arterioles. Beyond the arterioles,
the blood passes through a vast amount of tiny, thin-walled
structures called capillaries. Here, the blood gives up its oxygen
and its nutrients to the tissues and absorbs from them carbon
dioxide and other waste products of metabolism. The blood
completes its circuit by passing through small veins that join to form
increasingly / larger vessels until it reaches the largest veins, the
inferior and superior venae cavae, which return it to the right side of
the heart.
Immune System
6. The body defends itself against foreign proteins and infectious

micro organisms by means of a complex dual system that depends
on recognizing a portion of the surface pattern of the invader. The
two parts of the system are termed cellular immunity, in which
lymphocytes are the effective agent, and immunity, based on the
action of antibody molecules.
Respiratory System
7. Air travels to the lungs though a series of tubes and airways. The
two branches of the trachea, called bronchi, subdivide within the
lobes into smaller and smaller air vessels. They terminate in alveoli,
tiny air sacs surrounded by capillaries. When the alveoli inflate with
inhaled air, oxygen diffuses into the blood in the capillaries to be
pumped by the heart to the tissues of the body, and carbon dioxide
diffuses out of the blood into the lungs, where it is exhaled.
Digestive and Excretory Systems
8. The energy required for maintenance and proper functioning of the

human body is supplied by food. After it is broken into fragments by
chewing and mixed with saliva, digestion begins. The food passes
down the gullet into the stomach, where the process is continued
by the gastric and intestinal juices. Thereafter, the mixture of food
and secretions, called Chyme, is pushed down the alimentary canal
by peristalsis, rhythmic contractions of the smooth muscle of the
gastrointestinal system. Absorption of nutrients from chime occurs
mainly in the small intestine, unabsorbed food and secretions and
waste substances from the liver pass to the large intestines and are
expelled as faeces. Water and water-soluble substances travel via
the bloodstream from the intestines to the kidneys, which absorb all
the constituents of the blood plasma except its proteins. The
kidneys return most of the waster and salts to the body, while
excreting other salts and waste products, along with excess water,
as urine.
The Endocrine System
9. In addition to the integrative action of the nervous system, control of

various body functions is exerted by the Endocrine Glands. An
important part of this sytem, the pituitary, lies at the base of the
brain. This master gland secretes a variety of hormones, including
the following:-
(a) A hormone that stimulates the thyroid gland and controls its
secretion of thyroxin, which dictates the rate at which all cells
utilize oxygen.
(b) A hormone that controls the secretion in the adrenal gland of

hormones that influence the metabolism of carbohydrates,
sodium, and potassium.
(c) Substances that control the secretion in the ovaries of estrogen

and progesterone and the creation in the testicles of
testosterone.
(d) The somatotropic, or growth, hormone, which controls the rate

of development of the skeleton and large interior organs.
(e) A insulin inhibitor – a lack of insulin causes diabetes mellitus.
The Reproductive System
10. Reproduction is accomplished by the union of male sperm and the

female ovum. Ovulation, the release of an egg into the uterus,
occurs approximately every 28 days, during the same period the
uterus is prepared for the implantation of a fertilized ovum by the
action of estrogens. If a male cell fails to unite with a female cell,
other hormones cause the uterine wall to slough off during
menstruation. From puberty to menopause, the process of
ovulation, and preparation, and menstruation is repeated monthly
except for periods of pregnancy.
SECTION 2
HYGIENE AND SANITATION
11. Introduction. Hygiene is the Science which seeks to preserve and

improve the health of the individual and of the community as a
whole. Its study is aimed at making the cadets aware of the many
health hazards and to enable them to look after themselves more
efficiently. It seeks to develop in them the concept of healthy living.
Personal Hygiene
12. Personal hygiene involves all aspects of the health of an individual.

The responsibility for the maintenance of personal health therefore
lies with the individual. The basic factors that can make a person
healthy are:-
(a) Sleep. Sleep means the periodical rest of body and mind. The
aount of sleep one requires varies with individuals and age.
(b) Bathing. Keeping the skin clean and in healthy condition is

essential for good health. A warm bath in winter and cool one in
summer and use of soap are essential for body cleaning.
(c) Eating and Drinking. Properly cooked food with its full nutritive
value is beneficial for health. Eat slowly and chew well. Do not
swallw hastily. Drink plenty of water between meals.
(d) Food and Rest. Properly balanced diet is essential for physical
well being. Food should be hygienically and properly cooked. It
should be chewed well and taken in proper proportion. Sufficient
rest, recreation and sleep are essential for mental and physical
fitness.
(e) Care and Cleanliness of skin, hand, hair and teeth.
(f) Exercise. Organizd games and physical exercises are

necessary for proper development of body and mind.
Water Supply and its Purification
13. Sources of Water Supply. The sources of water are rain, surface
water and underground water.
14. Purification of Water. Safe drinking water comes only from an
authorized source. Purification provides good and safe water by
eliminating the suspended water, harmful salts and disease germs.
15. Methods of Purification. The following methods are used:-

(a) Boiling and distilling water.
(b) Filtration.
(c) Sterilization.
(d) Pinking. During cholera epidemic Potassium Permagnate

should be used for pinking of wells.
(e) Precipitation. By adding alum or some similar chemical to

water which carries all impurities to the bottom with it and leaves
pure water. Water is then passed through a filter.
Latrines
16. Th ese are:-

(a) The Water Carriage System. It implies ample supply of pipe
water available to carry the faeces away. It is simple, hygienic
but requires a lot of money and time.
(b) Aqua Privy Latrines. Nominal cost, used where construction of
water carriage systems is not possible.
(c) The Removal System. It implies collection of faeces and
subsequent removal for final disposal. The method is not very
hygienic.
(d) Deep Trench Latrines (DTLs). A pit three feet wide, at least
eight feet deep and of a length suitable to the requirements is
constructed and wooden seats placed over it with proper
partitions and curtains. Soil may necessitate reverting of sides
with sand bags, bamboos or with netting.
(e) Shallow Trench Latrines (STLs). It is used for temporary
camps i.e. for camps of less than a week’s duration dig a row of
trenches in parallel, each trench being 3 feet long 1 foot wide
and 2 feet deep. Each trench should be 2 feet apart. The ratio is
5 trenches for the first hundred users and three for each
subsequent hundred. After defecation cover the excreta with
loose earth by a shovel or a scoop. Fill the trenches after 24
hours and get new trenches dug.
Urinals
17. (a) Trough Urinals. Made of corrugated plain galvanized iron bent
in the form of a gutter and mounted on four wooden legs. It slopes
slightly towards one end where a vertical drain pipe runs down in a
soakage pit.
(b) Funnel Urinals. For temporary camps funnel urinals can easily
be constructed over a simple soakage pit.
Soakage Pits
18. Essential for the disposal of liquid refuse like greasy water from
kitchen and waste water from bathrooms. Dig a pit 4 feet by 4 feet
to 6 feet deep. Fill with small stones and broke bricks. Cover the
top with oiled sacking and put earth or sand 6 inches above. In the
centre, keep a perforated empty tin of kerosene oil. Fill this tin with
layers of gravel or sand and gravel. In this, fit in a bucket, filled with
straw, grass or some other grease retaining material. Remove the
strainer daily and replace with fresh one.
Disposal of Garbage
19. Disposal of solid refuse like kitchen garbage, bones etc. must be
done by burial or burning. The household refuse should be
deposited in a covered bin placed outside. Improvise out of ordinary
kerosene oil tins if bins are not available. Further disposal should
be done under municipal arrangements.
SECTION 3
PREVENTABLE DISEASES
20. Introduction. Many of the deadly diseases can be prevented form

spreading to healthy persons if proper precautions are taken by
checking infection and contagion of several diseases and by killing
the carriers of several other diseases.
21. Classification of Diseases. Communicable diseas can be

classified as follows:-
(a) Excremental Diseases. The germs pass from the body of a

sick man suffering from the diseases along with excreta (urine
and faeces). The excreta can contaminate food, water or hands
of cooks and thus pass the infection. Eg fever, typhoid,
dysentery, diarrhea, jaundice and intestinal troubles caused by
intestinal worms.
(b) Droplet Infection. The germs are sprayed from the nose, throat
or lungs in the air in small droplets of saliva during coughing,
sneezing or even while talking. These germs are inhaled by a
healthy person man if he happens to be near the sick. Eg
common cold, tonsillitis, influenza, diphtheria, meningitis and
tuberculosis.
(c) Contact Diseases. The germs pass from the sick to the healthy
by actual body contact. Veneral diseases and skin infections
pass from sick person to healthy persons through actual bodily
contact. Complete segregation of the patient can prevent the
spreading of the disease.
(d) Insect Borne Diseases. The germs move from a sick person to
a healthy person through blood sucking insects known as
‘Carriers’. These insects first bite a sick person and then a
healthy person leaving the germs of the diseases in the blood of
the healthy person. These germs multiply in the blood of the
healthy person and he shows the symptoms of the disease.
These are:-
(i) Carried by mosquitoes. Eg Malaria, Dengue Fever and

Filariasis.
(ii) Carried by sand fly. Eg Sand Fly Fever, Kalazar, Oriental

sore.
(iii) Carried by lice. Eg Typhus, Relapsing fever.
(iv) Carried by files. Eg Diarrhoea, Dysentery, Cholera, Typhoid.
(v) Carried by fleas. Eg Plague, Typhus.
(vi) Carried by ticks. Eg Relapsing fever, Typhus.
(e) Water Borne Diseases. Certain disease spread due to

infection carried through water. These are cholera, dysentery,
diarrhea, jaundice etc. These spread as water gets
contaminated through vomits or faeces passing into it.
Epidemics are likely to spread if immediate steps are not taken
to disinfect water and to properly dispose off the excreta
through efficient conservancy arrangements. All sources of the
disease ought to be segregated.
(f) Animal Borne Diseases. The germs are transmitted through

the agency of animals by drinking milk or through insects. Eg
rabies, plague, anthrax and tuberculosis.
22. Preventive Measures. The following preventive measures are

necessary to ward of these diseases:-
(a) Segregate the patient.
(b) Destroy agents (germs) causing infection.
(c) Disinfect.
(d) Control of the food and drink.
(e) Inoculation and vaccination.

SECTION 4
FIRST AID IN COMMON MEDICAL EMERGENCIES
23. Introduction. There will be a number of occasions on which we

may be faced with situations where we may be required to provide
first – aid to the injured because of an accident or due to any
calamity. Therefore, it is very important for all cadets to have
knowledge of providing first aid in common medical emergencies.
An NCC cadet must be able to provide timely help and first aid in
that kind of situation.
24. Principles of First Aid.
(a) Should be given immediately.
(b) Keep patient comfortable and relieve anxiety.
(c) Remove crowd, allow fresh air.
(d) Give artificial respiration if required.
(e) Stop haemorrhage.
(f) Treat shock.
(g) Remove patient to hospital.
25. Situations When First Aid is Necessitated. Fractures of bones;

injuries to internal organs; burns and scalds; snake bite, Scorpion
bite and rapid dog bite; foreign body in Eye, Ear and Nose;
asphyxia due to drowning / hanging / strangulation / suffocation etc;
insensibility or Unconsciousness; artificial respiration.
Fracture of Bones
26. Definition. Fracture is a discontinuity or a break in a bone resulting

in the dissolution of the supporting frame work of the body.
27. First Aid Treatment. Reassure the patient and make him
comfortable. Apply splints to immobilize the fracture with any
common article like stick, rifle etc. Relieve the patient from pain.
Keep the patient warm. Do not meddle with the fracture and
transfer to the nearest hospital immediately.
Injuries to Internal Organs
28. These Injuries cannot be seen but can only be suspected where
bleeding instead of coming to surface, occurs into the cavity of
chest or abdomen where in important organs like heart, lungs, liver
or spleen might get ruptured.
29. First Aid Treatment. Keep the patient warm am\nd lying down with
feet raised up and head kept low. Apply cold application on the
suspected injured region. Cheer up the patient. Arrange medical
attention as soon as possible.
Burns and Scalds
30. Burns may be caused by heat, either dry as by contact with fire or
flame. Burns caused by moist heat such as hot water, hot fluids and
stream, is called a Scald. Chemical burns may be caused by strong
acids or alkalies. If the burn is chemical let water from a pipe or
hose flow freely on the burn so that the chemical flows off.
31. First Aid Treatment. Protect burnt area by applying bandage or

cover exposed part with clean towel or cloth. Give complete rest
and plenty of fluids to the patient. Re-assure the patient. Give him
morphia if available. Evacuate patient to the nearest hospital or
dispensary.
Snake, Scorpion and Rabid Dog Bite
32. Snake Bite. When bitten by a snake, the poison is injected by the
snake through a pair of hollow and deeply grooved biting fangs.
The majority of bites occur on part of limbs which are exposed like
hands, feet and lower legs. All causes of snake bite should be
treated as being bitten by poisonous snakes. Make the victim tie
down comfortably. Give convincing reassurance against fear of
death. Apply a light constricting tourniquet with handkerchief,
bandage or shoe lace above the knee foe a bite on the leg and
above the elbow for a bite on the arm. So that the poison does not
flows to all the part of the body. Wash with soap and water. Use
water freely, Incise into the skin 2” x1/2” across the fang mark with
a blade. Suck the blood either with mouth or with a suction pump.
Be careful that there is no cut or ulcer in the mouth. Evacuate the
patient quickly to the nearest dispensary or hospital. If breathing
fails, stat artificial respiration.
33. Scorpion Bite. Bite with a scorpion should be treated as snake
bite. If blood has been drawn, the would should be cleaned well
with antiseptic lotion. Evacuate casualty to the nearest dispensary
or hospital.
34. Rabid Dog Bite. Rabies is a very dangerous disease transmitted

by a rabid dog. The disease is preventable by giving anti-rabies
vaccine. Immediately wash with water and soap. Would should be
cleaned with available antiseptic. Patient should be sent to hospital
for anti-rabies injections. Dog and the patient should be kept under
observation.
Foreign Bodies in Eye, Ear and Nose
35. Foreign body in Eye. Particles of coal or dust may lodge on the
eye-ball or inside the eye lid causing discomfort and damage to the
tender structure. Ask the patient not to rub the eyes. Wash the eye
with water repeatedly for a minute or to. Search for the foreign
body. If the foreign body is seen, it can be wiped off with the
moistened corner of a handkerchief, cloth or cotton swab. If foreign
body is fixed to the eye-ball, patient should be sent to the hospital
with a light eye bandage.
36. Foreign Body in Ear. This is common with children. They often
put beads, peas, nuts and other objects into the ear or an insect
may get into the ear. Do not try to remove the foreign body with the
help of a pin or forceps as this may push the foreign body further in
causing damage to the ear drum. The patient should be sent to the
hospital.
37. Foreign body in Nose. This is a common occurrence among

children. They might put peas, beads etc. in the nostril. Blowing the
nose ans sneezing may expel foreign body. Make the casualty
breath through the mouth. Do not try to remove the foreign body.
Send the patient to the nearest hospital.
Asphyxia
38. Anything which interferes with respiration producing irregularities in

breathing produces a condition known as Asphyxia. Remove the
cause if possible or the casualty from the cause. Ensure that there
is a free passage for air. Lay the individual on his back. Press the
head back-wards supporting the neck on your palm. Lift the tongue
clear of the airway. Give mouth to mouth breathing.
40. First Aid for Special Cases – Drowning. Wet clothes should be
loosened. Mouth, throat and nostrils should be cleaned of mucus
and of any foreign body. Patient should be made to lie sown over
his belly, face down, head turned to one side, arms starched
beyond the head, tongue pulled out. Artificial respiration should be
give till he starts breathing. Cover the patient with a blanket.
41.First Aid in Case of Strangulation or Hanging. Cut the

constriction, clear the air passage, start artificial respiration, give
inhalations if possible, make the patient warm and comfortable.
42.First Aid in Case of Chocking. Bend the casualty’s head and

shoulders forward, to dislodge the obstruction. In case of a small
child hold him upside down, and thump his back hard between the
shoulder blades or encourage vomiting by passing two fingers to
the back of the throat.
43.First Aid in Case of Suffocation by Poisonous Gas. Protect

yourself and remove the casualty from the gas as early as possible.
44.First Aid in Case of Electric Shock. Switch off or break the

current if possible. Remove the casualty from contact with the
current, if possible. Stand on some insulating material such as
rubber soled shoes or boots or piles of newspaper. Give artificial
respiration. Treat for shock and burns.
Insensibility or Unconsciousness
45. It is due to interruption of the action of the brain through some

interference with the functions of the central nervous system.
46. First Aid Treatment. Make the patient lie down with head turned
to one side, pull out his tongue. Loosen the clothing, ensure fresh
air if breathing has stopped or is irregular, start artificial respiration.
Keep the air passage clear. Nothing should be given by mouth.
Remove false teeth, if any.
Artificial Respiration
47. If there is any irregularity in breathing or a cardiac arrest, artificial

respiration is given. If it is given coorectly and in time, the patient’s
life can be saved.
SECTION 5
DRESSING OF WOUNDS
48. Definition of Wound. It is the break in continuity of the skin or

muscles membrane. It is caused by violence.
49. First Aid Treatment. Place the patient in a comfortable position.

Stop the bleeding, if any. Remove any foreign body that’s visible
and can be easily removed. Prevent entry of germs by applying
sterilized dressing like first field or shell dressing. Give rest to the
part by sling. Immobilize the part, if wound is large or complicated
by fracture. Treat the patient for shock. Sent the patient to nearest
hospital.
50. Dressing of Wounds. A wound is to be cleaned with anti septic

lotion and covered with cotton or guaze place with medication
before applying bandage.
51. Aim of Dressing Wounds. The aim of dressing of wounds is

manifold:-
(a) To protect the wound from infection.
(b) Reduce swelling and early healing
(c) To support the effected part.
(d) Enable the individual to carry out his day to day routine.
(e) Stop the bleeding.
52. Articles Required. Anti septic (A/S) lotion, cotton, gauze piece,
bandage of different size and band aid, A/S ointment or powder and
scissor.
53. Procedure. Reassure the patient and place him in comfortable

position. Stop the bleeding, remove foreign body and clean the
wound with A/S lotion and cotton. Apply A/S
SECTION 6
YOGA – INTRODUCTION
54. Introduction. Health is not merely considered by absence of

disease or infirmity in a person but who has complete state of
physical, mental and social well being. Fitness of a person strictly
relates to his ability to meet the demands of the environment. Yoga
fulfils all needs to be in a state fo complete fitness. Sage patanjali
was founder and father of Yoga. Yoga of Patanjali is Ashtanga or
has eight fold paths named Yama, Niyama, Asana, Pranayama,
Pratyahara, Dharma and Samadhi.
55. Yoga is a science for right living. Yoga not only relieves pain,
rigidity and tension but it gives much more to acquire peace and
mental tranquility. Yoga calms and clears the mind and rejuvenates
it. Yoga helps in purifying the disrupted natural rhythm and
harmony of the body, bestows grace, heals and makes one free
from all ill effects.
56. Holistic Appoach of Yoga. One undergoes through various

degrees of stress, strain, tension, anger, sadness and other
emotional upsets in day to day life. This adversely affects the
physical, mental and spiritual power of a person. Yoga harmonises
all disturbances in the body and eradicates ill effects completely.
For better management of stress, strain and other disorders, yoga
approach is more holistic, which brings efficiency and mental
clarity.
57. Stress Management by Yoga. Today no one can escape stress

due to high expectations and pressures from the environment, be it
industrial sectors or students or armed forces. Yoga provides
physical, mental and spiritual strength, thus help in overcoming the
stressors.
58. Asanas. There are innumerable Asanas. Some of the Asanas

useful for curing ailments and maintain good healths are
Padmasana, Baddha Padmasana, Siddhasana, Gyan Mudra,
Trikonasana, Ardha Chandrasana, Suryanamaskara, Shavasana,
Gomukhasana, Vajrasana, Dhanurasana, Bhujangasana,
Chakrasana, Sarvangasana, Halasana.
59. Conclusion. Perfect state of health means attaining physical,
mental and spiritual health. Yogasanas are simple activities for
keeping the internal and external parts of the body in good health.
However, Yogasanas must be learnt from qualified instructor to
gain maximum benefit.
CHAPTER IX
ENVIRONMENT AND ECOLOGY
SECTION 1
ENVIRONMENT
Introduction
1. The earth is the only planet in the solar system that supports life.
Life on earth exists in the biosphere, a narrow zone made up of
land, water and air extending up to a few kilometers above and
below the earth’s surface. The conditions in which an organism
exists make up its environment. The physical components of the
environment include materials such as rocks, soil, water and air.
Environment
2. Since ages man in related with the environment. He resides in the

surroundings along with different plants, tress and animals.
Increase in number of people, thus increase in consumption of
food, water and space, leaves less and less space for other
animals and plants which means that many environmental
problems have been caused by people. Global warming, acid rain
and holes in the ozone layer are just three such examples. Any
substance / condition that affects organism in any way, is known as
the factor. The sum of all such factors constitutes the environment.
The place, where an organism lives, is known as the habitat of that
organism.
Role of the NCC Cadets towards Environment
3. NCC cadets are well organized to carry out environmental

awareness campaign which is the need of the hour. NCC cadets
can conduct tree plantation drives in order to curb the menace of
environmental degradation. They should be the motivating and
guiding force to friends and family members. As responsible
citizens every one should plant tress and not cut them. Water
conservation and proper disposal of the waste also leads to the
safeguarding of the environment. Therefore, it should be the duty of
every NCC cadet to educate others towards this grave problem.
SECTION 2
ECOLOGY
4. Introduction. The word ecology was coined from the Greek word
‘Oikos’ which means home. Ecology, therefore, means the home of
plants, trees and also the animals that survive on them. Ecology is
the study of organisms and the inter-relationship among organisms
and the environment. The destruction of our forests has led to the
disturbance of the delicate balance in the entire ecosystem. It has
given rise to grave risks for the very survival of life on earth. Only
recently we have started correcting this dangerous situation.
Eco-System
5. Eco-system is the basic functional unit which includes both the

organisms and non-living environment, each influencing the
properties of the other and each one is necessary for maintenance
of life on the earth.
6. Development of Ecology: A sweeping statement like all

development is destructive would seek to convey the impression
that the protection and preservation of ecology is the fadd of a few
freak groups who are out to run down development as the root
cause of all out ills and irritations. Industrial development is ofe\ten
blamed for the destruction of ecology as it causes pollution,
whether through the smoke being belched out by chimneys in the
various factories etc or through effluents being constantly dumped
into rivers. We need not forget the fact that our civilization has
traversed through several stages to reach its present position.
However, progress has not been achieved only at the cost of
ecology. There have been several other factors contributing to the
modern scientific civilization.
7. Ecology has been defined as the study of organisms in relation to

their environment. This covers the whole world of organic life –
plants including a fungi and animals including microbes and man.
Then there is the environment itself, which includes not only the
animate organisms that populate the biosphere but also the
inanimate forces operating in the nature. Ecology plays an
important role in agriculture, forestry, fisheries and in the
conservation of soil, wild life, forests, water resource management
etc.
8. Our long term survival depends on environment. We must not,
therefore, ignore this fact. Environment and economic
developmental goals must consequently go hand in hand. The
struggle is now on for preservation and adequate renewal of these
resources. Attempts are being made to check the reckless
destruction of our precious environment.
9. Environmental degradation is drawing phenomenal attention of the

academicians and policy makers. During the lost two decades
because of rapid and indiscriminate industrialization all over the
globe, the most precious heritage of man-the natural environment is
in danger. Today it is realized that investments in environmental
conservation and pollution control measures would enhance
productivity in the long run, rather than be a stumbling block in the
path of development.
10. Greenhouse Effect: The Greenhouse Effect arising due to

increased carbon dioxide content and increase in global
temperature and depletion of ozone layer due to
chlorofluorocarbons used, poses the greatest threat to the very
existence and survival of human beings and flora and fauna around
the globe. The greenhouse effect, acid rain, ozone depletion and
nuclear winter all these reflect human interference in the
environment and all these reflect human interference in the
environment and all these reflect human interference in the
environment and all have become synonymous with catastrophe.
Respect for ecology is, therefore, a vital part of any responsible
strategy. Investment in conservation and pollution control measures
would be beneficial in the long run.
Conclusion
11. The study of ecology and environment sciences has assumed

great significance, particularly during the second half of the 20 th
century. While ecology deals with the study of structure and
functions of nature, ecology must be at the core of any
environmental science programme. Ecology provides the most
scientific approach and methodology to understand and evaluate
the most scientific approach and methodology to understand and
evaluate the present day environmental crisis and to find ways and
means to resolve the crisis so as to ensure a better tomorrow for
the human race.
SECTION 3
CONSERVATION OF ENVIRONMENT AND ECOLOGY
12. Introduction. Ecology covers the whole world of organic life-plants,

including fungi and animals including microbes and humans. The
environment in which all organisms exist includes not only the
animate organisms that populate the bio-sphere but also the
inanimate forces operating in nature. Thus agriculture, forestry,
fisheries, soil, wildlife, forests, mountains, water bodies and water
sources, rocks, air and forms of energy such as heat and light are
essential physical components of the system that nature has, which
ensure that living beings get every thing they need to survive from
their surroundings. In order to live, all organisms must interact with
the environment, not destroy it. However, to meet his many needs,
man alters his natural surroundings. Some times such changes
disturb the natural process and worsen the living conditions of
human beings and other organisms. In other words, they degrade
the environment.
13. Environment, Life and Ecology: There is an unmistakable

relationship between all life forms and the environment with
undisturbed ecological balance. The conditions in which a living
organism lives, makes ip its environment. Energy resources give
energy in useful form for existence. While sunlight, wind and water
are renewable energy resources, others like minerals, coal,
petroleum and natural gas are non-renewable and are fast
depleting. Wood is renewable but mindless deforestation can make
depletion faster THAN RENEWAL. With depletion of resources due
to over-use and wastage, the problem of environmental
degradation has started affecting the entire planet and needs to be
tackled at all levels. Natural environment, has been suffering a
tremendous onslaught by reckless development hinged on the
criteria of technical feasibility and economic profitability only. All
human developmental activities have impinged upon the natural
environment and caused serious ecological imbalances.
14. Conservation Measures: Protection of natural wealth and

conservation of nature and life in all forms is a matter of great
concern. Checking environmental degradation is a crying need.
While degradation is affecting the entire planet and conservation
has the attention of all countries, each person has personal
responsibilities in this. Following are some of the measures that
must be co-ordinated or taken by each one as the case may be, for
survival of life on earth:-
(a) Keeping air, land, rivers and water bodies clean and natural.
(b) Tree plantation and stoppage of indiscriminate felling of trees.
(c) Prevention of wastages and over-use of all natural resources.
(d) Re-using industrial wastes.
(e) Consumption of non-renewable resources by using renewable
resources as far as possible.
(f) Modern sewage disposal techniques.
(g) Restrictions on using chemical substances and toxins harmful
to soil water and air.
(h) Fumes, smoke and exhaust gases to be rendered harmless by
innovative design of machinery and technology.
(i) Treatment of effluents.
(j) Observing strict emission levels.
(k) Elimination of nuclear waste.
(l) All waste to be biodegradable.
(m)Non-biodegradable waste to be recycled.
(n) Water bodies to be kept chaste.
(o) Protection of nature in all forms.
(p) Protection of all life forms.
(q) Strict policies, regulations and incentives for protection and
conservation of nature and life forms.
(r) Impetus to research and development for environment-friendly
technology.
(s) All development involving the bio-sphere to be environment –
friendly technology.
(t) Management of environmental pollution, at all levels including
homes, such as smoke, use of sprays, garbage disposal, non-
bio-degradable waste, water pollution.
(u) Protection of wild life.
(v) Checking human population explosion.
(w) Cleanliness drives for rivers, water-bodies and soil (to remove
non-bio-degradable).
(x) Ensuring environmentally rational behaviour in oneself and
others.
(y) Developing environmental consciousness amongst common
people through classroom instructions, posters and hoardings,
public and media campaigns.
SECTION 4
POLLUTION AND ITS CONTROL
15. Introduction: Pollution means imbalance in the atmosphere

caused by pollutants. Air gets polluted with the smoke from homes,
factories and vehicles. Water gets polluted by city and factory
wastes. Loud noises cause sound pollution. Pollution spreads
diseases and makes life uncomfortable on earth. Increase in
population and industrialization, unscrupulous felling of trees,
depletion of greenery and forests and the pollution of the earth’s
atmosphere have led to reduction of the protective ozone layer and
increase in global warming.
16. Types of Population.

(a) Land Pollution: Today’s industrialized society produces a
huge amount of garbage. Non-biodegradable wastwes such
as polythene bags, which cannot be decomposed by natural
agents like bacteria have become a menace to the
environment besides being health hazards. Use of chemical
fertilizers and pesticides containing harmful substances
contaminates the soil.
(b) Water Pollution: Waste water from our homes, hospitals and
factories is usually discharged in the water bodies. Such water
contains excreta, disease causing micro-organisms and
harmful chemicals. It makes water unfit for drinking and may
even kill aquatic plants and animals. Plant nutrients derived
from fertilizers and organic wastes like dead bodies thrown in
to water sometimes cause excessive growth of weeds. Many
aquatic organisms die as a result of oil spills from tankers.
Leaking pipelines also pollute water organisms. Many species
of birds and fish die from contact with oil as it makes feathers
and gills inactive.
(c) Air Pollution: Air pollution is caused by harmful substances
emitted into the atmosphere by industries and automobiles. It
causes respiratory diseases and affects the skin and eyes.
Some of the gases emitted by industries dissolve in rainwater
to produce acid rain, which can damage vegetation.
Atmospheric ozone which protects us from harmful ultra-violet
rays is depleted due to release of certain carbon compounds
called Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) into the atmosphere. This
also increases the risk of skin cancer and eye damage in
humans.
(d) Sound Pollution: Sound produced from motor vehicles,
trains, aero planes, factories, sound during religious and
political public meetings, noise produced by the masses and
other living creatures also plays an important role in producing
sound pollution. It also affects the human heart: create
auditory problems and causes mental stress.
17. Measures to Control Pollution:
(a) To develop consciousness among common people to control

all pollution. Plant more and more trees.
(b) The use of loud horns or mindless blowing of horns by motor

vehicles should be banned.
(c) The water bodies should not be used as waste reservoirs.
(d) Various sources of drinking water, and water resources should

be well protected so that dirty water does not enter these
water bodies.
(e) Environmental education should be made compulsory in all

educational institutions.
(f) Excessive use of pesticides and insecticides should be

avoided.
(g) In all towns and cities there should be proper arrangement of

dustbins to collect garbage being produced in the houses.
(h) In the factories strict precaution should be instituted to avoid

pollution of various types.
(i) Running of old and pollution emitting vehicle should be

banned.
18. Role of the NCC Cadets in Curbing Pollution. NCC youth can
guide and contribute by educating others about the dangers of
pollution. We have to respect our environment and natural
resources and not pollute the same. Rivers and water bodies must
be kept clean as water is an essential resource and it cannot be
wasted. In fact every drop has to be saved. Cadets can visiti
villages and guide the farmers regarding the use of natural manure
instead of chemical fertilizer produced after generating industrial
waste.
CHAPTER X
SELF DEFENCE
SECTION 1
PRECAUTIONS AND GENERAL BEHAVIOR OF
BOY AND GIRL CADETS
1. Introduction. Youth form an important proportion of any country’s

population and play a very important role in its progress. They are
at an age when they are young, filled with new ideas and
enthusiasm to bring these to fruition. They are, however, also at an
age when mistakes, misbehavior and rash-behavior are certainly
possible but entirely avoidable.
2. Precautions. NCC includes students, from both schools and

colleges, who follow NCC motto of ‘Unity and Discipline’. Therefore,
the general behavior of these cadets has to be up to the mark. For
this, certain precautions have to be taken so that boys and girls
cadets realize their responsibilities and become role models for the
youth of the country. They should keep away from drugs, alcohol
and tobacco. They should avoid bad company or even company
which leads them to nowhere. They must make friends after judging
them. They should be able to make use of their leisure hours in a
constructive manner by engaging in some constructive hobby such
as reading, music, painting, gardening or whatever they are
interested in, instead of frittering away their time in idleness.
3. Behavior. Cadets should be strictly disciplined, peaceful, friendly

and co-operative, have a sense of healthy competitiveness, remain
free of jealousy, maintain positive attitude and have respect for
each other. As a general rule, and as cadets in particular, boys
should not have a bad attitude towards girls, eve-tease or indulge in
vulgar behavior or language. In fact, they must behave elegantly
with them and should always respect their privacy. Healthy and
normal intermingling between boys and girl cadets is desirable and
a clean friendship must be maintained.
4. Conduct of Personal Daily Routine. Cadet must give due

concern to their personal and dental hygiene. They should actively
participate in sports and games and take keen interest in exercise,
outdoor activities and strictly follow constructive daily activities.
SECTION 2
PREVENTION OF UNTOWARD INCIDETS
5. Introduction. As NCC cadets, with a built-in sense of

responsibility, it is necessary that prevention of untoward incidents
is ensured by all boy and girl cadets. As is the old saying that
“Prevention is better than cure”, one must guard against
undesirable incidents. In doing so, not only do we help ourselves or
others but can also help in making our society a better place to live.
6. Untoward Incidents. Some of the untoward incidents that one can

sometimes come across are road accidents, pick-pocketing,
hooliganism, theft, robbery, eve-teasing, molestation and sexual
harassment.
7. Remedies. The above incidents can be avoided if every person of

society knows his/her responsibility towards society. Following are
certain measures that can be taken to prevent these untoward
incidents:-
(a) Road Safety. To avoid accidents and mishaps, one should
drive/walk carefully on the roads. Follow all safety rules. Take
into account all signals. Start early to reach in time. Do not
over-speed. Do not mix drinking and driving. Cross roads at
zebra-crossing. Where there is no zebra crossing, one should
look towards both sides and only then cross the road.
Children must be taught all road safety rules.
(b) Pick-pocketing, Hooliganism, Theft and Robbery. To
prevent pick-pocketing, one should avoid traveling in crowded
places, and should carry little cash and valuables. Cadets
should not indulge in hooliganism. If cadets see hooligans
indulging in such activities, and if it is a small and
manageable group and cadets are in a large number, they
can try for a peaceful dispersion. If the incident cannot be
controlled, cadets should report the same to nearest police
station or to any law and order authority.
(c) Eve-teasing, Molestation and Sexual Harassment. Boys
must abide by moral values from young age. They must learn
to respect a girl’s dignity. Girls should avoid traveling in
darkness and least of all, alone. Working together with the
opposite sex in a healthy environment must be ensured by all
cadets. Boy cadets must understand that eve-teasing,
molestation and sexual harassment are criminal offences.
SECTION 3
VULNERABLE PARTS OF THE BODY
8. Front. Eyes, ears, temples, nose, mouth, chin, front and sides of
throat, solar plexus, abdomen, fork (testicles), knees, chin and
insteps.
9. Behind. Base of skull, spine, (specially cervical and lumber

regions), kidneys, coccyx or testicles.
****************************** Picture of page No. 109
Vital spots of the body
10. The human body has various sensitive or vulnerable spots, which in
unarmed combat are considered as vital spots. These spots, such
as solar plexus, temple and fork are very difficult to toughen,
consequently, the degree of pain or injury from a blow of these
spots will be graver and more serious than to the other parts of the
body.
11. A soldier therefore must familiarize, himself with the various

degrees of vulnerability of vital spots and the body weapons, which
would enable him to select the proper target to achieve the aimed
injury and also to be able to defend against a seasoned blow
effectively.
SECTION 4
PHYSICAL SELF DEFENCE / UNARMED COMBAT
Introduction
12. The form of self defence which an individual has to employ against
an armed or unarmed enemy has always been the cause of
concern for a soldier through the ages. Whenever a man faces a
wild animal or an enemy, has concern is to render his adversary
ineffective by any available means.
13. It is with the aim of ensuring self preservation that most of the
modern day martial arts and arts of self defence were invented
through the ages. The Unarmed Combat is a collection of offensive
as well as defensive techniques derived from material arts and
combat sports which are ideally suited to the requirement of
warfare where surprise is of paramount importance.
14. Training in unarmed combat aims at installing the idea into a soldier
that the fight is not over, even though he has been disarmed and,
that a seemingly hopeless and unarmed defensive situation can be
changed into an aggressive and attacking position.
Principles
15. In order to enable the soldier to derive maximum benefit from a

given situation by the use of unarmed combat, it is essential that he
is aware of the various principles of unarmed combat. It is only by
rigid adherence and implicit application of these principles that
success can be ensured. The various principles are enlisted
below:-
(a) Ruthlessness. War is a matter of life and death, especially

where unarmed combat is concerned, hence there must be no
scruples or compunction over the methods employed.
‘RUTHLESSNESS’ is necessary in order to gain mastery of the
enemy, and it must be used without any mercy. The brutal
method of attack, such as kicking, gouging the eyes, blow etc.
must be used without any hesitation. Emphasis must be laid on
this from the very first lesson and a note made of the occasion,
when such attacks should be employed.
(b) Determined Effort. All attacks must be aimed and carried out
in a fierce, ruthless and determined manner. A “half hearted”
attack will always be futile and loses half its effectiveness.
(c) Attack Vulnerable Points. The soldier must be taught to close

in with the enemy, whether the latter is armed or otherwise and
immediately attack the most vulnerable points open to him, to
achieve the aim. The location of these will depend upon the
enemy’s dress, equipment and his position i.e. standing,
kneeling, facing or with back to the attacker.
(d) Efficiency of Initial Attack. The vigor and suddenness of

attack will probable catch even an armed opponent at a
disadvantage, for it is unlikely that he will anticipate an attack
from an unarmed man. The initial attack must be aimed at
killing or disabling. However, if only a knock down or stunning
blow can be delivered, it must be followed quickly by a hold,
lock or throw which should succeed in giving the attacker,
complete mastery over his enemy, even to the point of killing
him.
(e) Surprise and Speed of Attack. Any defensive movement

followed by speedy counter attack, must be aimed to catch the
enemy by surprise. The surprise gained would diminish the
chances of effective counter attack by the enemy.
(f) Retaining Initiative. Surprise, speed, strength, smoothness of

execution and perhaps the most important of all, the gaining
and retention of initiative, are essential if success is to be
achieved. However, no two enemies will attack in precisely the
same manner, but the skilled opponent of unarmed combat, by
virtue of his knowledge gained, combined with constant practice
with varied partners, under different conditions, will have variety
of move at his commander to overpower his enemy.
CHAPTER XI
ADVENTURE ACTIVITIES
1. Introduction. Adventure activities are activities which channel the

energy, initiative and hidden talents of young people into healthy,
disciplined and gainful activities. There is a saying that all work and
no play makes one dull. Students spend 100% of their time in
studying this course or other. Too much study of only academic
material makes one narrow minded.
2. Aims of Adventure Training.

(a) To develop special qualities of courage among the cadets.
(b) Develop leadership qualities.
(c) To develop and enhance the spirit of adventure, sportsmanship
and confidence in cadets.
(d) To develop spirit of camaraderie, team work and self
confidence.
(e) To make a cadet confident, disciplined physically and mentally.
(f) To develop ability to take risks for a given purpose.
3. Adventure Activities in NCC. NCC provides an excellent

opportunity to the cadets for adventure. The adventure activities
conducted by the NCC are trekking, rock climbing, mountaineering,
para – jumping, water skiing, sailing, yachting, kayaking, hang
gliding, white water rafting, para – sailing, glider and microlight
flying and sailing expeditions.
4. Points to be Borne in Mind before Planning Adventure

Activities.
(a) Plain should be realistic and not over ambitious.
(b) Physical standards of the participants.
(c) Finances.
(d) Selection of Cadets.
(e) Number of participants.
(f) Selection of route and halts.
(g) Logistics.
(h) Collection of prior information.
(i) Liaison of Civil / Military authorities.
(j) Medical Cover.
CHAPTER XII
NAVAL ORIENTATION
SECTION 1
HISTORY OF THE INDIAN NAVY
1. The history of the Indian Navy can be traced back to 1612 when
Captain Best encountered and defeated the Portuguese. This
encounter, as also the trouble caused by the pirates, forced the
British East India Company to maintain a small fleet at Swally, near
Surat (Gujarat). The First Squadron of fighting ships arrived on 05
September 1612, forming what was then called the Honorable East
Indian India Company’s trade in the Gulf of Cambay and the river
mouths of the Tapti and Narmada.
2. Although Bombay had been ceded to the British in 1662, they

physically took possession of the island on 08 February 1665, only
to pass it on to the East India Company on 27 September 1668. As
a consequence, the Honorable East India Company’s Marine also
became responsible for the protection of trade off Bombay.
3. By 1686, with British commerce having shifter predominantly to

Bombay, the name of this force was changed to Bombay Marine.
This force rendered unique service, fighting not only the
Portuguese, Dutch and French, but also interiopers and pirates of
various nationalities. The Bombay Marine was involved in combat
against the Marathas and the Sidis and participated in the Burma
War in 1824. In 1830, the Bombay Marine was renamed “Her
Majesty’s Indian Navy”.
4. Whilst the Navy’s strength continued to grow, it underwent

numerous changes of nomenclature over the next few decades. It
was renamed the Bombay Marine from 1863 to 1877, after which it
became ‘Her Majesty’s Indian Marine’. At this time, the Marine had
two divisions, the Eastern Division based at Calcutta under the
Superintendent, Bay of Bengal, and the Western Division at
Bombay under the Superintendent, Arabian Sea. In recognition of
the services rendered during various campaigns, its title was
changed to Royal Indian Marine in 1892, by which time it consisted
of over 50 vessels. The Royal Indian Marine went into action with a
fleet of minesweepers, patrol vessels and troop carriers during the
First World War.
5. The first Indian to be granted a commission was Sub Lieutenant DN
Mukherji who joined the Royal Indian marine as an Engineer Officer
in 1928. In 1934, the Royal Indian Marine was re-organized into the
Royal Indian Navy, and was presented the King’s Color in 1935 in
recognition of its services. At the outbreak of the Second World
War, the Royal Indian Navy consisted of eight warships. By the end
of the war, its strength had risen to 117 combat vessels and 30,000
personnel who had seen action in various theatres of operations.
6. On India attaining independence, the Royal Indian Navy consisted

of 32 ageing vessels suitable only for coastal patrol, along with
11,000 officers and men. The senior officers were drawn from the
Royal Navy. The prefix ‘Royal’ was dropped on 26 January 1950
with India being constituted as a Republic. The first Commander-in-
Chief of the Indian Navy was Adm Sir Edward Parry, KCB, who
handed over to Admiral Sir Mark Pizey, KBE, CB, DSO in 1951.
Admiral Pizey also became the first Chief of the Naval Staff in
1955, and was succeeded by Vice Admiral SH Carlill, CB, DSO. On
22 April 1958 V Adm RD Katari assumed office as the first Indian
Chief of the Naval Staff.
SECTION 2
MAIN PARTS OF A SHIP
7. The Hull.
(a) The main body of a ship is called the Hull. It is divided

approximately into three parts viz the Fore, the Midship and
the After part. The fore parts end in the Stem, the After part in
the Stern (Fig XII – 1). When standing anywhere inside the
hull, a man is facing forward when he faces the stem and facing
aft when he faces the stern.
********** Figure of page No. 114

(b) Any line which runs lengthways in the ship is said to run fore-
and aft and the line joining the middle of the stem to the middle
of the stern is called the Fore and –Aft Centre Line (middle
line or centre line in ships plans and drawings) (Fig XII – 2).
*************** Figure of page No. 115
(c) The vertical plane (surface) passing through the fore-and-aft

centre line divides the shop into two halves. When facing the
bow, the Starboard side is on the right hand and the Port side
is on the left (Fig. XII – 3). It is customary to give equipment,
such as ship’s boats, odd numbers on the starboard side and
even numbers on the port side.
*************** Figure of page No. 115

8. Hull Surfaces.
(a) The sides of a hull can be described generally as starboard or

port, meeting under the bottom of the ship at the Keel. The
curved surface of the after part is called the Quarter (port or
starboard); the centre part is referred to as Amidships (Fig XIII
– 4).
********** Figure of page No. 116
(b) When a ship is afloat or water-borne the waterline divides the

sides into ship’s side above the waterline and bottom below it.
These terms are used in a general sense, for example, when
painting a ship’s side or scraping her bottom. A more precise
definition of an area can be achieved by referring to the side,
the part and the waterline. Eg. The ship was holed on the
starboard bow two metres below the waterline.
(c) The continuous horizontal surfaces of a ship are called Decks

and if exposed they are called Weather Decks. Those that are
not continuous are called Flats or Platforms.
9. Terms Applied to the Hull (Fig XIII – 5).
(a) Freeboard. The height of the highest continuous watertight

deck (usually known as the upper deck) above the waterline at
any point along the hull.
(b) Draught. The depth of the keel or propeller or any underwater

fitting whichever is the lowermost, below the waterline at any
point along the hull.
(c) Beam. The greatest width of the hull.

(d) Camber. The curve given to the surface of a deck so that water
drains away to the ship’s side.
(e) Sheer. The upward sweep from amidships to forward and aft of
the upper deck.
(f) Bilge. The nearly flat part of the bottom of the hull both inside
and out. Bilge is also the foul water that collects inside the ship
in the bilges.
(g) Bilge Keel. A long projecting fin designed to decrease the

rolling of a ship. It is normally secured to the hull at the turn of
the bilge.
************* Figure of page No. 117
(h) Tumble Home. When the ship’s slope or curved inwards above
the waterline they raw said to tumble home.
(i) Flare. When the ship’s side curve outwards above the waterline
they are said to be flared.
(j) Flush Deck. When the uppermost deck of a ship is continuous

from stem to stem, unbroken by any raised or sunken portion
(except upper works or superstructure), the ship is said to be
flush-decked.
10. Decks. Whatever the arrangement of decks in different ships may
be, it is useful and instructive to know their origin.
(a) At the time of the Armada, the ends of the upper deck were built
up in tiers of decks to from castles from which the soldiers could
fight. They were called Forecastle and Aftercastle. The lower
part between the castles was called the Waist (Fig XIII – 6 (i)).
************ Picture of page No. 118
(b) By the end of the eighteenth century, the level of the upper deck
had been raised to make room for additional gun decks. Naval
warfare had developed, but castles still existed. They were then
called the Topgallant Forecastle and the Poop. The forecastle
was that part of the upper deck before the foremast and the
quarterdeck was that part of the upper deck between the
mainmast and the poop (Fig XIII – 6 (ii)).
(c) The decks below the upper deck were then named Main,
Middle, Lower and Orlop. The space below the Orlop deck
was knon as the Hold (Fig XIII – 6(iii)).

(d) On the upper deck, were the booms amidships over the main
hatch; as the name implies, they constituted the stowage for
space and the ship’s boats (Fig XIII – 6(iv)).
(e) Right aft on the main deck were the Admiral’s cabins for his
staff, and the space between them and the mainmast was called
the Half Deck. The space between the mainmast and the
foremast was the waist. And the space between the foremast
and the bows, which housed the kitchens, was known as the
galley (Fig XIII – 6(v)).
(f) Most of these terms have been retained in naming decks of a

modern ship and adapted to suit change in construction and
design. However, in warships the decks are now numbered
consecutively downwards, starting with the forecastle deck as 1
deck. The decks above 1 deck are numbered 01, 02 and so on.
The highest complete deck (except in aircraft carriers) is known
as the upper deck.
(g) Parts of Decks. Certain parts of any of these decks may also
have special names. Below the upper deck, a flat is a platform
that does not run the length and breadth of a ship and a lobby is
a space giving access to one or more compartments.
These flats or lobbies may be named according to the principal
adjacent compartment or equipment installed. Eg Wardroom
flat, Captain’s lobby, Capstan Machinery Flat. Alternatively,
deck number and positions in the ship relative to the bow and
the centre line may be used to refer to them. The arrangement
of the weather decks and superstructure of a ship is shown in
(Fig XIII – 7).
***************Figure of page No. 120
Fig XIII – 7 – Arrangement of Weather Deck and

Superstructure of a Warship
SECTION 3
NAVAL TERMS
11. A landsman lives in a house and therefore a seaman speaks of

living in a ship and not on a ship. If a seaman arrives by a boat he
goes up an Accommodation Ladder, which is secured outboard
(board is the old name for a ship’s side). Thereafter he comes over
the side and he is then onboard. If the ship is lying against a dock
wall it is alongside and the seaman crosses a Brow from the dock
to the ship.
12. Having reported his return, he then goes below by a Ladder that
gives access tot eh deck below through an opening in the deck
called a Hatch. He then reaches his living quarters (Mess) which is
in a space of the ship called Mess deck of which the walls are
called Bulkheads, the ceiling is called the Deck Head and the floor
is the Deck.
13. Amidships describes the position roughly in the middle of the ship;
it also describes the position roughly on the fore-and-aft line.
Midships is used when defining an object located in the middle of
the ship or nearest to it.
Position Athwartships
14. A position athwart or across the ship is described relative to either

the centerline or the sides. The centerline divides the ship into port
and starboard, while the ship’s side gives an inboard and outboard
position. In (Fig XIII – 8), the ship is carrying three boats. One is
swung outboard to port; the other two are stowed inboard to
starboard. When comparing the position of the two boats stowed on
the starboard side, the black boat can be described as lying inboard
of the white boat, or the white boat outboard of the black.
*************** Figure of page No. 121
15. The position of an object can be clearly described by combining the

two methods, as shown in (Fig XIII – 9).
*************** Figure of page No.121

16. Movement of Objects Onboard. The following terms are generally
used to describe the movement of objects on board:-
(a) To launch is to drag or heave an object along.
(b) To lift and launch is to lift an abject and then to heave it along.
(c) To fleet is to shift an object a short distance.
(d) To ship is to place an object in its proper position.
(e) To unship is to remove an object from its proper position.
17. General Naval Terms.
(a) Ahead. Means directly in the line of advance.
(b) Abeam. Abreast on either starboard or port.
(c) Stern. Means directly in the ear.
(d) Both Watches. Muster of the ships company except those on

essential duties and off watch keepers or detaining them for
work.
(e) Drag. A ship is said to be dragging when her anchor(s) are not
holding firmly on the ground.
(f) Gangway. Any recognized entrance to or passage way or traffic

route within a ship. Also used as an order or warning to make
way.
(g) Jetty. A platform built out from the shore on plies so that there
is sufficient room alongside it to berth ships.
(h) Quartermaster. Sailors who steer the ship at sea are called
Quartermasters. In harbor these personnel man the gangway,
run the routine of the ship and are responsible for the safety of
the ship and its boats under the Officer of the Day/Watch.
(i) Routine. This is the time table based on which the men
onboard do their routine work, eat their meals, rest and proceed
on liberty.
(j) Sickbay. The Ship’s hospital.
(k) Ship’s Company. All the personnel of a man-of-war other then

the Officers.
SECTION 4
TYPES OF WARSHIPS AND ROLES
18. Ships whether they are warships or otherwise, can be classified

under ‘Type’ and ‘Class’. The word ‘Type’ is used to distinguish
ships built for different purposes, whereas ‘Class’ distinguishes
ship of the same type which have minor differences in their
structure etc. The main features that divide the warships into
various types can be classified as its function, construction,
displacement, length, beam, draught, speed, armament,
complement and other factors including features. The ships of the
Indian Navy can be classified in two main categories viz fighting
ships and auxiliaries:-
Type Main Functions Recognition Features

FIGHTING SHIPS
Aircraft (i) Provide offensive air (i) Flat top.
Carrier strength at very long (ii)High freeboard flush
ranges i.e. attack. deck, squat and
(ii) Reconnaissance. compact island
(iii) Interception of enemy superstructure amid on
aircraft. the starboard side.
Viraat
Cruiser (i) ‘Eyes and Ears of the (i) Long and very
Fleet’ conspicuous
(ii) Long range convoy superstructures.
escorts. (ii) Two separate
(iii) Bombardment. superstructures.
(iv) Combine hitting
power with speed and
manoeuvrability.
Delhi Class. Delhi, Mysore, Mumbai
Destroyer (i) ‘Maids of all work’. (i) Long and high
(ii) AA/AS protection for forecastle and low
convoys and Naval units. upper deck.
(iii) Inshore bombardment (ii) Long superstructure.
and cover for landing
crafts.
Rajput Class. Rajput, Rana, Ranjit.
Ranvir Class. Ranvir, Ranvijay.
Frigate AA/AS escort and patrol Forecastle higher than
duties. quarter deck, both
short and the later
cluttered with depth
charge.
Godavari Class. Godavari, Gomati, Ganga.
Talwar Class. Talwar, Trishul, Tabar.
Brahmaputra Class. Brahmaputra, Betwa, Beas.
Giri Class. Dunagiri, Udaygiri, Taragiri, Vindhyagiri.
Corvette. (i) To carry out SSM (i) Low freeboard.
attacks on enemy. (ii) Flight deck at the
(ii) Provide cover to stern.
surface naval units. (iii) SSM containers at
the forecastle.
Khukri Class. Khukri, Kuthar, Kirpan, Khanjar.
Kora Class. Kora, Kirch, Kulish, Karmuk.
Veer Class. Veer, Nirbhik, Nipat, Nishank, Nirghat, Vibhuti, Vipul,
Vinash, Vidyut, Nashak, Pralaya, Prabal.
Abhay Class. Abhay, Ajay, Akshay, Agray.
OPV (i) Patrolling operations.

(Offshore (ii) Search and Rescue.
Patrol
Vessel).
Sukanya Class. Sukanya, Subhadra, Suvarna, Savitri, Sharada,
Sujata.
Minesweeper. (i) To sweep mines (i) Superstructure is

ahead of fleet. nearer to the bows than
(ii) To clear ports and the stern.
harbor channels of (ii) Reels and cranes at
mines. the quarterdeck.
Pondicherry Class. Pondicherry, Porbandar, Bedi, Bhavanagar,
Allepey, Ratnagiri.
Karwar Class. Karwar, Cannonore, Cuddalore, Kakinada,
Kozhikode, Konkan.
Mahe Class. Mahe, Malpe.
Missile Boat. (i) Provide cover to Conspicuous missile

surface naval units. pads occupying almost
(ii) SSM for shore entire length of the
targets. ship.
Chamak Class. Chamak, Chapal.
Landing Landing assault troops, (i) Continuous upper
Craft/Ship guns, tanks, equipment deck with small
and stores on beaches. superstructure aft.
(ii) Anchor at stern.
(iii) High sheer of the
forecastle.
Magar Class (LST) – Magar, Gharial.
Kumbhir Class (LST (M)) – Ghorpad, Cheetah, Guldar, Sharabh,
Mahish, Kumbhir.
LUC – L 32 – 39.
Submarine. (i) Attacking surface (i) Black cigar shaped.

naval and merchant (ii) Conning tower with
units. periscope amidships.
(ii) Patrolling in enemy
waters.
Shishumar (SSK) Class. Shishumar, Shankush, Shalki, Shankul.
Sindhughosh (EKM/Kilo) Class. Sindhughosh, Sindhudhvaj,
Sindhuraj, Sindhuvir, Sindhuratna, Sindhukesari, Sindhukirti,
Sindhuvijay, Sindhurakshak, Sindhushastra.
Vela (Foxtrot) Class. Vela, Vagli.
Coastal Force For patrolling operations in own coastal waters
esp in shallow dept prone areas.
Tarasa Class FAC (G) – Tarasa, Trinkat.
Seaward Defence Boats – T 54-59, Mithun.
FACs – T 80 – 84
Ser Type Main Functions Recognition Features
AUXILIARIES
Tanker Replenishment of (i) High freeboard.

fleet ships at sea (ii) Oil rig booms, cranes and
with fuel, water derricks fitted on
superstructure.
(iii) Superstructure near stern.
Jyoti, Aditya, Shakti
Hospital Ship. Evacuation of casualties.

Tir
Ocean Going (i) Assist in towing (i) Superstructure nearer to

Tug ships at sea. the bows than the stern.
(ii) Tow targets for (ii) Hawser reels and towing
firing practice. bollards at Quarterdeck.
Matanga, Gaj
Survey Ship Hydrographic White in color.

operation for
charting waters.
Sandhayak Class – Sandhayak, Nirdeshak, Nirupak, Investigator,
Jamuna, Sutlej, Darshak, Sarvekshak.
Torpedo (i) Recover (i) Superstructure nearer to
Vessel torpedoes after the bows than the stern.
firings. (ii) Torpedo launcher, crane
(ii) Fire torpedoes at Quarterdeck.
for trials.
TRV 72, Astravahini
Training Ship Designede to train officer cadets with special

provision for class – rooms, mess decks etc made
inside the ship.
Tir Class. Tir.
Leander Class. Krishna.
Sail Training Ships. Tarangini.
SECTION 5
NAVAL CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS
The Hand Salutes
19. Salutingis an indication of the discipline of an individual or a unit –

perhaps the most elementary form of military courtesy and display
of respect for a superior. The point to be noted is that it is not the
individual who is being saluted; it is the uniform and the rank of the
superior which is being accorded this courtesy.
20. There are many theories regarding the origin of salutes. According
to one, salutes and salutati9ons were marks of submission, it is
also probable that the Army and Air Force salute with the palm
facing outward to indicate that it is empty. However, the naval
salute has the palm facing inwards. The accepted explanation for
this is that since a sailor’s hands are invariably dirty and calloused
from work, keeping the palm hidden is more appropriate.
21. On the upper decks of a ship, a junior salutes his superior officer on
first meeting in the morning, when spoken to, and on withdrawing
after a conversation or receiving orders. Salutes are not exchanged
in public places or below decks, where the senior is to be wished
instead. Unlike the Army and Air Force, naval personnel are
permitted to salute in civilian clothes or when their head is
uncovered, particularly in response to a salute from another.
22. When reporting to a senior officer in a room or cabin, it is

customary to knock, enter when granted permission, and wish the
superior. Headgear is normally tucked in under the left arm or left
hanging on a rack outside before entering the room.
23. When two or more officers are walking together, only the senior
most officer acknowledges the salute. If all officers are of the same
seniority on the concerned flank acknowledges.
24. When two officers of different Services are together only the senior
acknowledges the salute. However, if they are of the same or
equivalent rank, irrespective of seniority, the officer belonging to the
senior Service is to acknowledge. The sequence of seniority of the
Services is: Army, Navy and Air Force.
25. All passengers in vehicles are expected to salute their superiors
except when traveling in a public transport. However, the rider of a
cycle or the driver of a vehicle is exempted from saluting due to the
danger from taking his eyes off the road.
Saluting with Weapons
26. The first part of the Sword Salute wherein the hilt is raised to the
lips, almost certainly originated from the crusades, when it was
customary to kiss a crucifix before going into battle. The crucifix
was recognized by the handle and guard of the sword, and became
more recognized with the passage of time.
27. The sword held at arm’s length was originally the hail or initial
salute to the superior. The act of allowing the point of the sword be
lowered towards the ground was an ancient act of submission.
28. In a manner similar to the sword salute, the Presenting of Arms with
a rifle is symbolic of disarming oneself. The rifle is held in a position
which suggests that it is being offered as a mark of trust and
friendship.
Other Salutes
29. Pulling boats come to oars, in which the oars are feathered parallel
to the water surface while the coxswain salutes with his right hand,
remaining seated so as not to rock the boat. Sailing boats salute by
letting fly their sheets, thus taking off headway. This custom is said
to have arisen from the time when junior ships were expected to
lower their sails in the vicinity of the Grand Admiral. Over a period
of time, it became the practice to only let fly the sheets, which in
any case deprived a vessel of her manoeuvrability and was akin to
standing to attention. During Colors and Sunset, motor boats salute
by stopping their engines, with the Coxswain or the senior officer
aboard standing up and saluting.
30. Ships salute by piping ‘Still’ on the boatswain’s call, or sounding the
Alert on the bugle for salutes to Flag Officers. If the Flag Officer is
afloat in his barge while passing a ship underway, the latter will
salute the Flag Officer with a pipe only, within the prescribed
timings, as is the case for two ships exchanging salutes when both
are underway.
31. Merchantmen salute warships by dipping their flag or Ensign, as
the case may be. This is promptly answered by the warship dipping
her Ensign. Thereafter, the merchant ship hauls up her flag only
after the warship has done so. The present day courtesy of dipping
the flag signifies the acceptance of a warship’s status by the
merchantman. Warships are expected to promptly return this salute
by dipping their Ensign in turn.
Piping the Side
32. A traditional mark of respect paid to certain officers in uniform is

‘Piping the Side’ in addition to the salute while they are embarking
or disembarking. This privilege is reserved for Flag Officers,
Commanding Officers, Officers of the Guard, members of a Court
Martial and all officers belonging to foreign Navies (other than those
of Commonwealth Nations) and corpses.
********** Picture of page No. 129
33. The custom arises from the days of sail, when visiting senior
officers did not have the convenience of an accommodation ladder
and were hauled aboard in a boatswain’s chair or a basket. The drill
movements in this regard were carried out in time with the pipe,
with the pitch of the note signifying the speed at which the visiting
dignitary was hauled aboard. The duration of this pipe was 12
seconds. The custom of piping all foreigners originated from the
desire to avoid causing offence to a visiting officer due to a lack of
knowledge of his rank. Officers from the Commonwealth, however,
wear similar badges of rank posing no difficulty in recognition, and
therefore are not piped unless entitled to it by their appointment.
Man and Cheer Ship
34. Another custom is that of honoring a dignitary by Man and Cheer

Ship. In general, however, manning of the ship today is restricted to
lining up on the upper decks only, and is done on special occasions
such as entry into port by ships which have shared in a victory,
ceremonial reviews, steam past and to bid farewell to a senior
officer. The men line up on the ship’s side facing outwards, with the
shortest in the centre and the tallest on the flanks. At the order to
cheer, caps are removed and three dais given to the person being
saluted. The Commanding Officer keeps his cap on and salutes
from a conspicuous position. The salute is acknowledged by a
simple hand salute by the dignitary being honored.
Funeral Honours
35. It is customary for all service personnel to salute a dead body being
carried for a funeral. Similarly, personnel attending a funeral salute
after placing the wreath. It is customary to drape the coffin or the
body of service personnel with the National Flag. This symbolizes
the fact that the departed died in the service of his country, and the
State accepts full responsibility for what it ordered him to do. The
Flag is removed prior to the cremation or burial and handed over to
the next-of-kin.
36. It is also customary to reverse the normal order of precedence at

funerals. Much of this ceremonial is in recognition of the fact that all
men are equal in death. The deceased is carried feet first with his
peak cap, medals and sword being placed atop the National Flag
spread over the coffin or gun carriage.
37. The Last Post is sounded on conclusion of the prayers at a funeral

to symbolize that it is the last bugle for the deceased. It is followed
by the Reveille, or the Rouse as it is called on such occasions.
Some believe that this is symbolic of the greatest Reveille which
the Archangel Gabriel will sound some day to bring all the dead to
life. Service personnel remain at the salute during and between the
sounding of the Last Post and the Rouse. All flags except personal
flag are half-masted during the period of mourning, which
traditionally lasts till sunset on the day of the funeral.
Burial at Sea
38. One of the most emotionally charged ceremonies at sea is that

which consigns mortal remains to the deep. In ancient times the
Romans and Greeks placed coins in the mouth of the deceased to
pay the fare for his transportation over the River Styx. The body
was prepared for burial at sea by being sewn into shrouds, and the
sail maker took the last stitch through the nose of the deceased.
39. In the event of death aboard a ship, it is customary for the Medical
Officer to report immediately to the Officer of the Watch, who logs it
and reports to the Captain. While the body is preserved and
handed over to the relatives ashore in most cases, circumstances
may occasionally demand a burial at sea. In this event, all
personnel not on essential duty attend the funeral, which is
conducted by the Captain. The body duly sewn up in weighted
shrouds is covered by the National Flag, which is removed just
before the body is consigned to the deep after the funeral service.
Superstition has it that sea birds are spirits of dead sailors buried at
sea, which is why no sea bird will ever come to harm at the hands
of a seaman.
40. In our country, where burial is not the only means of performing the
last rites, this tradition has over the years been modified. In the
event of naval personnel being cremated ashore, the urn containing
the ashes is brought on board and placed on the quarterdeck with
due solemnity. When the ship reaches the designated area, the
guard Presents Arms, the Last Post is sounded and the ashes
along with flowers are consigned to the waters. As the ashes
intermingle with the waves and the final notes of the Rouse fade
away the ship records the position of the ceremony on the chart
and gets underway.
Flags, Crest & Motto
41. Naval Ensign. A warship’s suit of Colors comprises the National

Flag and the Naval Ensign. These symbolize the State and the
Navy respectively, and are held in high reverence by all ranks,
indicating subordination to the Nation and the Service. The
association of Colors with heroic deeds has caused them to be
regarded with veneration. In a sense, they epitomize the history of
the Service.
42. Naval Crest and Naval Motto. The Naval Crest consists of the
Ashoka emblem, a foul anchor and a shield, and its navy blue color.
Below the crest is the motto of the Service –‘Shano Varuna’ –
meaning ‘May the Lord of the Oceans be Auspicious Unto Us’.
On 18 Mar 1952, Chakravarti Rajagopalachari gave to the Indian
Navy its motto.
SECTION 6
NAVAL SHORE ESTABLISHMENTS
AND NAVAL ORGANISATION
43. The Naval Headquarters (NHQ) of the Indian Navy is situated in

New Delhi. The Chief of the Naval Staff (CNS) of the Indian Navy
lives in New Delhi. He is responsible to the President of India for
the maritime Defence of India. In this task the CNS is assisted by
four Principal Staff Officers (PSO) of the rank of Vice Admirals who
are:-
(a) Vice Chief of the Naval Staff (VCNS) - Staff Branch I.
(b) Deputy Chief of the Naval Staff (DCNS) - Staff Branch II.
(c) Chief of Personnel (COP) - Personnel Branch.
(d) Chief of Material (COM) - Material Branch.
44. The PSOs are assisted in their duties by the following Assistant
Principal Staff Officers (APSOs) of the rank of Rear Admirals:-
(a) Assistant Chief of the Naval Staff (ACNS).
(b) Assistant Chief of Personnel (ACOP).
(c) Assistant Chief of Material (ACOM).
45. The Chief of the Naval Staff exercises command, through the
following authorities:-
(a) The Flag Officer Commanding-in-Chief Western Naval

Command (FOC-in-C WEST; Headquarters – Mumbai).
(c) The Flag Officer Commanding-in-Chief Eastern Naval

Command (FOC-in-C EAST; Headquarters – Visakhapatnam).
(d) The Flag Officer Commanding-in-Chief Southern Naval

Command (FOC-in-C SOUTH; Headquarters – Kochi).
(e) The Flag Officer Commanding-in-Chief Far Eastern Naval

Command (FOC-in-C FAR EAST; Headquarters – Port Blair).
46. Fleets. The Indian Navy has 2 Fleets viz. Western Fleet and
Eastern Fleet. They are commanded by Flag Officers of the rank of
Rear Admiral. (Fleet is a group of various types of ships and
aircrafts grouped together for conduct of operations).
47. The Flow Chart depicting the Organization of the Indian Navy is
given below:-
********************** figure of page No. 133
48. Shore Establishments. Shore establishments function under the

Administrative Authority (C-in-C) and serve the following functions:-
(a) Training officers and sailors.
(b) Providing logistic support, berthing and allied harbor facilities,

such as playgrounds recreation facilities etc. to ships.
49. The location and main functions of the establishments of the Indian
Navy are given below:-
Ser Location / Naval Est Purpose / Function
(a) New Delhi. INS India Administrative establishment of
NHQ.
(b) Mumbai. INS Angre Administrative establishment of
WNC.
INS KUnjali (i) Naval Detention Quarters
(Naval Jail).
(ii) School of Regulating Branch
(Naval Police).
(iii) Helicopter Base.
INS Trata (i) School for Naval Musicians.
(ii) Naval Coastal Battery.
INS Agnibahu Admin Establishment for Local
Flotilla (Small Ships).
INS Vajrabahu Depot ship for Submarines
INS Abhimanyu Marine Commando School
INS Hamla School for Logistics Branch
INS Asvini Naval Hospital and school for
Medical Assistants
(c) Lonavala. Naval Engineering College.
INS Shivaji
(d) Kochi. (a) Administrative establishment of
INS Venduruthy Southern Naval Command.
(b) The main training
establishment of the Executive
officers and seaman sailors of:-
(i) Signal, ND, ASW, Diving
Schools.
(ii) School of Maritime Warfare and
Tactics.
(iii) Seamanship School.
INS Dronacharya Gunnery School
INS Garuda (i) Naval Air Station.
(ii) School for Naval Airmen.
(iii) Naval Air Technical School.
(e) Visakhapatnam.
INS Sanjivani Naval Hospital, Visakhapatnam
INS Circars Administrative establishment of
Eastern Naval Command.
INS Virbahu Submarine depot ship
INS Satavahana Training school for Submarine
INS Kalinga Missile Assembling Unit
INHS Kalyani Naval Hospital
Ser Location / Naval Est Purpose / Function
(f) Orissa. INS Chilka Sailors basic training
establishment
INS Nivarini Naval Hospital
(g) Kolkata. INS Netaji Naval establishment
Subhas
(h) Chennai. INS Adyar Naval establishment
(i) Arkonam. INS Rajali Naval Air Station (Largest Airport
in Asia)
(j) Porbandar. Naval Establishment
INS Dwarka
(k) Goa. INS Gomantak Naval establishment
INS Hansa Naval Air Station
INS Mandovi Naval Academy
INHS Jeevanti Naval Hospital
(l) Jamnagar. Training School for (Electrical
INS Valsura Branch)
(m) Port Blair. Naval Establishment
INS Jarawa
INS Utkrosh Naval Air Station
SECTION 7
ORGANIZATION ONBOARD A SHIP
50. The men onboard a ship are collectively known as the ‘Ship’s
Company’. For administrative purposes the ship’s company is
divided into departments (which correspond to the various
branches in the service). The senior most officer of each
department is known as the Head of the Department (HOD) and is
responsible to the Captain for the smooth functioning of his
department.
51. A ship is commanded by an Officer of the Executive branch who is

known as the Commanding Officer (CO) or the Captain. He may be
of any rank from Lieutenant to Captain depending on the size and
type of the ship. He has the ultimate authority on the ship and is
equally responsible for everything onboard.
52. Next in the hierarchy of a ship comes the Executive, Officer (EXO)
who may be of any rank from Sub Lieutenant to Commander and is
junior to the Captain. He is responsible to the Captain for the
fighting efficiency of the ship, the general organization and routine
of the ship. He is also responsible for the discipline, welfare and
morale of the ship’s company. In major ships the EXO is of the rank
of Commander and is known as ‘The Commander’. He is the Head
of the Department (HOD) for all officers of the Executive branch.
53. The Engineer Officer (EO) is responsible to the Captain for the
efficiency and maintenance of the propulsion system and auxiliary
machinery. The Electrical Officer (LO) is responsible for the
generation and distribution of power and effective functioning of
weapon systems, communication systems and various other
electrical and electronic equipment. The Logistics Officer (LOGO) is
responsible for efficient clothing, victualling and payship of all
personnel and availability of stores. The Senior Education Officer
(SEDO) is responsible for the efficient running of educational
training and examinations of sailors onboard. The Principal Medical
Officer (PMO) is responsible for the health and hygiene of
personnel onboard.
54. In the event of death/incapacity/temporary absence of the Captain

the command of the ship is vested in the senior most officer of the
Executive branch.
Divisional System
55. The main principal of the divisional system is that each division is
composed of a body of men who normally work and mess together
and therefore, know each other well. Each division is under the
charge of a Divisional Officer who is also from the same
department. He is responsible for the administration, training,
advancement, welfare and general efficiency of his division.
56. For general administrative and welfare purposes, the ship’s

company is divided into a number of ‘Divisions’ which correspond
with the departments in the ship e.g. Electrical Division, Logistics
Division etc. As the seaman sailors are generally large in number
they are divided into divisions corresponding to their part of ship.
Part of Ship System
57. Seaman sailors have varied sub specializations like Gunnery,

ASW, ND and depending on their sub specializations; they are
characterized into parts of ship. This system is for cleanship,
maintenance and general ship work.
58. The Foxle is under Gunnery, Top is under ND and Quarter deck is
under ASW departments. Each part of ship is under the charge of a
CPO/PO known as the Captain of The Top (COT).
Watch System
59. In a ship, a continuous watch has to be maintained, day and night

and at sea or in harbor. This is to ensure her safety and ensure her
readiness for any duty she may be asked to undertake. It is
absolutely mandatory for a proportion of her complement of officers
and sailors to be on the watch, either actively engaged or standing
by at immediate notice. In the Indian Navy there are two types of
watch organization as follows:-
(a) Two Watch System. The ship’s company is divided into two
watches, namely Port and Starboard watches. This system is
followed when more number of personnel are required.
(b) Three Watch System. The ship’s company is divided into three
watches, namely Red, White and Blue watches. This is the
most commonly used system in the navy both in harbors and at
sea.
(c) Four Watch System. The ship’s company is divided into four
watches, namely Port I, Port II, Starboard I and Starboard II.
This system is followed when there is absolutely no threat and
to provide a relaxed routine for the ship’s company.
SECTION 8
NAVAL ARMAMENT
60. The Naval armament can be divided into the following categories:-
(a) Surface weapons.
(b) Anti-Submarine weapons.
(c) Anti-Aircraft (AA) weapons.
(d) Weapons carried by Naval Aircraft.
(e) Small Arms.
61. Surface Weapons. The weapons used to attack surface targets

are known as Surface Weapons. These include Surface to Surface
Missiles (SSMs) and Guns (Medium and Close Range). These
weapons are controlled by Fire Control Systems that are capable of
detecting, tracking and destroying a target by accurately guiding the
fire power upon it. These can be fired in the –
62. Anti-Submarine Weapons. These weapons are used to destroy

underwater vessels and include:-
(a) Depth Charges. It contains high explosive in cylindrical steel

containers with depth setting arrangements which are thrown
from ships, aircraft and helicopters to explode and destroy a
submarine.
(b) Torpedoes. Torpedoes are self propelled underwater weapons

carrying a large explosive charge which can be launched in the
ship to ship, ship to submarine, aircraft to ship/submarine
modes.
(c) Anti-Submarine Rockets. These are A/S rockets weapons

fitted on ships and are fired with preset depth settings to
explode underwater and destroy a submarine. They can be fired
at greater distances from the ships.
63. Anti-Aircraft (AA) Guns. These include Surface to Air Missiles

(SAMs) and AA Guns. The rate of fire of these weapons is very
high due to the less reaction time available against an air attack.
64. Weapons Carried by Naval Aircraft. Naval aircraft carry

torpedoes and depth charges for action against submarines,
bombs, rockets, front guns and Anti Ship Missiles (ASMs) to
destroy surface targets and Air to Air Missiles (AAMs) to destroy
enemy aircrafts.
65. Small Arms. All armament below 30mm is called Small Arms. The
following Small Arms are used in the Navy:-
(a) Medium Machine Gun (MMG).
(b) 7.62 mm LMG (Light Machine Gun).
(c) 7.62 mm Self Loading Rifle.
(d) INSAS 5.56mm.
(e) 9mm Carbine.
(f) 9mm Pistol.
SECTION 9
RANK STRUCTURE OF OFFICERS AND SAILORS
66. Ranks of Officers.
Navy Army Air Force
Cadet Gentleman Cadet Cadet

Midshipman(Not Commissioned) --- ---
Sub Lieutenant Lieutenant Flying Officer
Lieutenant Captain Flight Lieutenant
Lieutenant Commander Major Squadron Leader
Commander Lt Colonel Wing Commander
Captain Colonel Group Captain
Commodore Brigadier Air Commodore
Rear Admiral Major General Air Vice Marshal
Vice Admiral Lt General Air Marshal
Admiral General Air Chief Marshal
67. Categories of Officers According to Seniority. Officers in the
Navy are categorized based on seniority as follows:-
(a) Subordinate Officers - Midshipman, Sub Lieutenant.
(b) Junior Officers - Lieutenant, Lt Commander.
(c) Senior Officers - Commander, Captain, Commodore.
(d) Flag Officers - Rear Admiral, Vice Admiral, Admiral.
68. Rank Flags. Flag officers are entitled, to display their rank-flags on
their cars, boats and specially marked places in establishments.
These flags are as under:-
(a) CNS - Naval Ensign.
(b) Admiral - White flag with naval crest on the right and
four stars on the left side.
(c) Vice Admiral - White flag with naval crest on the right and
three stars on the left side.
(d) Rear Admiral - White flag with naval crest on the right and
two stars on the left side.
(e) Commodore - Flies the Commodore’s Broad Pennant.
Car Plates
69. Following officers are entitled to display car plates:-
(a) CNS and Equivalents - 4 Stars.
(b) Vice Admiral and Equivalents - 3 Stars.
(c) Rear Admiral and Equivalents - 2 Stars.
(d) Commodores and Equivalents - 1 Star.

70. Color of Plates. The color of car plates is different for the three
services to enable easy identification as follows:-
(a) Army - Red
(b) Navy - Navy Blue.
(c) Air Force - Sky Blue.
71. Ranks of Sailors.
Navy Army Air Force
Sea II Sepoy LAC II

Sea I Lance Naik LAC
Leading Seaman Naik Corporal
Petty Officer Havaldar Sergeant
CPO Naib Subedar Junior Warrant Officer
MCPO II Class Subedar Warrant Officer
MCPO I Class Subedar Major Master Warrant Officer
72. The Army ranks of Naib Subedar, Subedar and Subedar Major are
known as Junior Commissioned Officers (JCOs). They receive the
President’s Commission and are saluted by the lower ranks.
SECTION 10
INTRODUCTION TO NAVAL AVIATION
The Beginning of a New Sega
73. At the time of Independence Rear Admiral Eart Mountbatten,

Governor General of India helped to convince the Indian
Government to develop the Indian Navy with Light Fleet Carriers as
the nucleus. The Government accepted the proposal in principle
and the Directorate of Naval Aviation was established in 1948 with
HC Ranalds, RN, as the Director.
74. To meet the pilot requirements for the two carriers, ten officers
underwent preliminary training at RNAS Donibristle in Scotland and
finally five were awarded wings in Aug 1950. Unfortunately one
officer was killed during operational training and only four fully
trained officers returned India in end 1952.
Arrival of Vikrant
75. Vikrant was one of the six ships of the Majestic Class that was
purchased by the Govt. of India in Jan 1957 and was
commissioned as INS Vikrant on 04 Mar 1961. Captain PS
Mahindra was the first Commanding Officer. The present day
NAQAS was established as Naval Aircraft Inspective Service
(NAIS) at Cochin on 04 Nov 1960, to function as an independent
quality control agency. Today, NAQAS controls a network of Radar
Aeronautical Inspection Organization.
Hansa Moves to Goa
76. With the liberation of Goa in 1961, Navy staked a claim for Dabolim
airfield to establish their second Air Station and decongest the
overcrowded Garuda. On 18 Jun 1964, INS Hansa and INAS 551
were shifted to Dabolim. INAS 300 followed soon after in Sep 1964.
77. In 1968 a Met Training School was established at INS Garuda for
providing weather support services to the Naval Aviation. On 05
Feb 1969, the Naval Aircraft Repair Organization (NARO) was
created to enable Navy to become self-sufficient in aircraft
maintenance. Later, NARO expanded its activities to include
modification, evaluation trail of new equipment and systems. NARO
was renamed as Naval Aviation Yard (Kochi) in 1981.
Kunjali – The Westside Story
78. Earlier in 1964, helicopters operated from a temporary grass

helipad at INS Kunjali. On 03 Apr 72, Bombay flight of INAS 321
was established at Kunjali with one Alouette III helicopter. On 01
Aug 80, another Alouette was added and INAS 321 was relocated
from Goa.
NAS Ramnad
79. The first naval detachment arrived at Ramnad in 1982 in the wake
of ethnic disturbances in Sri Lanka. The abandoned World War II
airfield at Ramanathapuram was taken over by the Navy on 09 Jan
85. The station initially operated islanders and Chetak aircraft.
Islander flight was subsequently disbanded in Jan 97. The station
was re-designated as Rajali II on 01 Jan 97.
INS Utkrosh – Extending Reach
80. During WW II the Japanese has built an airfield at Port Blair in

1942. Indian Navy took over this airfield from DGCA on 09 Apr 84
and the commissioning of the Air Station was done on 11 May 85.
A two islander flight, which had been operating since 1981, was
commissioned as INAS 318 on 08 Mar 84.
INS Viraat – The Second ‘Flat Top’
81. Indian Government announced on 24 Apr 1986 that an agreement

has been signed with British Government for the acquisition of the
aircraft carrier – HMS Hermes. INS Viraat, India’s second aircraft
carrier was commissioned on 12 May 1987. Capt Vinod Pasricha
was her first Commanding Officer. Meanwhile, Vikrant continued to
operate till 1994, after which ship laid up and eventually
decommissioned in Jan 1997. Today, it is open for visitors as a
maritime museum at Mumbai.
INS Dega – the Eastside Story
82. Indian Naval Aviation touched the eastern seaboard with the arrival
of the first Chetak at Vizag on 23 Sep 1972. In 1982, the Navy
formally took over the airport and NAS Vizag came into being. The
Air Station was formally commissioned as INS Dega on 21 Oct
1991.
INS Rajali
83. The airstrip at Arakkonam dates back to 1942 when it was used by
Allied Air forces. The Foundation stone of NAS Rajali was laid on
12 Nov 1988 and it was formally commissioned on 11 Mar 1992.
84. Naval Air Shore Establishments.
(a) INS Kunjali - Mumbai.
(b) INS Dega - Visakhapatnam
(c) INS Garuda - Kochi
(d) INS Hansa - Goa
(e) INS Rajali - Arakkonam

SECTION 11
INTRODUCTION TO SUBMARINES
Training With the Royal Navy
85. In 1962, Government approval was accorded and an agreement

was reached with the Royal Navy to train one senior officer and
eight other officers in submarine operation, tactics, maintenance,
and logistic support. A few key sailors were also deputed for
training.
86. The RN in their premier submarine establishment, HMS Dolphin,

conducted the training of our officers and men. This exposure to a
mature navy with decades of submarine operating experience was
invaluable to our early submariners, and played a vital part in the
formulation and consolidation of our submarine operating and
maintenance practices when ultimately the submarine Arm came
into being.
87. The next year, 1963, the long-awaited and much sought
Government approval to actually acquire submarines was
accorded, but more disappointments lay ahead. Negotiations were
held with the British Government for the transfer of a ‘Porpoise’ or
‘Oberon’ class of boat, but the talks made no progress. The British
were only prepared to lease us the old ‘T’ Class, and the financial
terms were not acceptable to the Indian side. After this stalemate,
the efforts to set up the Navy’s Submarine Arm went into a
temporary lull.
Acceptance of the Soviet Offer
88. In 1964, an offer was received from the Soviet Union of submarines
of the Type 641 (NATO code ‘Foxtrot’). An agreement was
concluded with the USSR in 1965 for the transfer by purchase of
four ‘F’ class submarines, which was one of the most successful
submarine designs then operating. The Soviet offer, which included
the training of crews at the far eastern Siberian naval base of
Vladivostok, was on the most favorable of terms, from every angle,
particularly that of finance. Accordingly, sixteen officers and about a
hundred sailors reached Vladivostok on the 02 June 1966. In
October 1967 the training in Vladivostok was completed.
A Force Comes into Being
89. On 08 Dec 1967, in Riga, USSR, the commissioning warrant was

read out and the Indian colors were hoisted on a submarine for the
first time in history. The Indian CO walked onboard, and the Indian
Navy marched into the submarine era.
90. INS Kalvari entered her homeport of Visakhapatnam for the first
time on 06 July 1968. On the day of her arrival in India, the CNS
laid the foundation stone of the submarine base building. The
remaining three submarines of this class were commissioned in the
next two years viz INS Khanderi (Dec 68), INS Karanj (Sep 69) and
INS Kursura (Dec 70). The first four submarines were constituted
into the 8th Submarine Squadron. The submarine base had
meanwhile been constructed and was commissioned on 19 May
1971, at INS Virbahu – ‘The Heroic Arm’.
The Submarines Need Afloat Support – INS Amba
91. The submarine tender Amba joined the Indian Navy on 28 Dec
1968 designed to provide logistic and technical support to the
submarines. In addition it also catered for comfortable
accommodation to submarine crews away from their main base.
INS Amba, was also capable of providing training to the submarine
attack crew. Her well equipped workshop could prepare and supply
torpedoes to our submarines operating away from their bases.
Baptism by Fire
92. From early 1971, the Submarine Arm was charged to prepare itself
to meet any threat to our national security. When ultimately the war
broke out, our submarines were deployed on both fronts, in the Bay
of Bengal as well as in the Arabian Sea, and ventured deep into
enemy waters. The presence of our submarines deprived the
enemy of much of his offensive power. The Submarine Arm
finished the war with a Mahavir Chakra, two Vir Chakras, a Nao
Sena Medal, and several “Mentions in Dispatches”.
A Period of Growth
93. By 1973, the small submarine force had consolidated itself in the
submarine base at Visakhapatnam. The Navy recommended to the
Government to procure four ‘F’ Class submarines. These
submarines were to be based on the West Coat, so as to disperse
the Navy’s assets. Accordingly, the next four submarines – Vela,
Vagir, Vagli and Vaghsheer, were commissioned between Aug 73
and Dec 74. These submarines designated the ‘Vela’ class, were
modernized versions of the ‘Kalvari’ class, with more capable
equipment, sensors and weapons.
INS Satavahana – The Submarine Training Establishment
94. INS Satavahana was commissioned on 21 Dec 1974 as a new

training establishment where personnel could be taught the
complexities of new and modern equipment, much of which had
never been in service in the Indian Navy before. This premier
training establishment derived its name from the great Satavahana
dynasty which ruled the whole of the Deccan and a large portion of
North India for four and a half centuries from about 20 BC. They
were great seafarers, and during their reign, Indian sailors ventured
to the far eastern islands of the Java and Sumatra kingdoms, and
colonies were established. On the West, the Satavahanas
established trade links with the Roman Empire. The crest of the
establishment contains the motif taken a Satavahana coin of that
period.
The Second Submarine Base
95. With the commissioning of the Vela class submarines commencing

in 1973, it became necessary to build the basic infrastructure for
operating and maintaining submarines in Bombay. The first
accommodation for submarine crews was a seven-story building
housed the office of the Captain (S/M) of the 9th Submarine
Squadron, when it was formed in 1974. The Submarine Base
Complex was inaugurated in August 1987.
Submarine Escape and Rescue in the Indian Navy
96. In the event of an accident where the submarine is unable to

surface, an attempt is made to bring her to the surface with the
assistance of ships and divers. If this is not successful, the only
alternative is for the crew to escape from the submarine rescue
vessel. This calls for a very high degree of discipline and training.
97. In 1971, the Indian Navy acquired the submarine rescue vessel INS
Nistar. This ship had the capability of rescuing the crew of a
disabled submarine from deep depths, using a “Rescue Bell”, by
the dry escape method, which meant that the problems associated
with decompression were avoided. The good ship Nistar rendered
yeoman service in the Navy before being pensioned off in 1989.
The diving tender Nireekshak, to whom she was bequeathed some
of her equipment such as the all-important divind bell, succeeds
her. A unique escape system in the Indian Navy is the rescue
sphere fitted in the Shishumar class, which enables the crew to
escape by the dry method.
98. Escape training is imparted to crews of our submarines in INS

Satavahana, and consists of both practice as well as theory. The
escape tower of Satavahana is a landmark in Visakhapatnam, and
it is here that nervor “rookie” submariners undergo the thrilling
experience of a free ascent from a depth of a hundred feet. The aim
of escape training is to instill confidence in the young submariner in
his equipment, and to make him familiar with its use so that he can
help himself and his comrades in an emergency.
The Modern Era
Type of Vessel Class of Vessel Fleet Strength

Nuclear – Powered Advanced Technology 5 Projected
Submarines Vessel
Project 76 – Amur SSK 6 – 8 projected
Project 75 – Scorpene 1 being built + 5
Diesel – Powered SSK more ordered
Submarines Sindhugosh {Kilo} 10 in service [1
Class undergoing mid-life
refit]
Shishumar {HDW 209} 4 in service
Class
Foxtrot Class 2 in service [1
undergoing refit]
SECTION 12
MERCHANT NAVY AND ITS ROLE
99. Merchant Navy can be defined as, “a commercial fleet of ships

transporting cargo all over the world by sea. As an introduction, if
need not be emphasized that shipping cargo by sea is an important
mode of transportation, particularly for countries with a vast
coastline, shipping ports and an elaborate water transport system.
The Indian merchant navy comprises passenger vessels, cargo,
liners, tankers, ore carriers, refrigerator ships that carry perishable
products as they have cold storage facilities, and other types of
specialized ships. In other words, merchant navy comprises a
country’s commercial shipping fleet and the merchant navy are the
sailors who work on them. These ships are operated by public and
private sector shipping companies and manned by a trained and
licensed crew (navigators, marine engineers etc).
100. Departments on a merchant ship are broadly classified into three

main areas; namely the Deck department, the Engine department
and the Service department. Thus many career options are
available for youngsters aspiring to join the merchant navy.
101. Proper interaction between the merchant navy and the Indian Navy
is essential in the present day global context, to maintain the most
effective state of readiness, in the event of a crisis. Such an
interaction will enable quick and effective action during a crisis.
There are innumerable instances in the annals of maritime history
which highlight the vital role played by the merchant navy.
102. The role played by the merchant navy in the Falklands War and the
Gulf War is a reminder of the usefulness of the Merchant Navy I the
theatre of operations during wartime. In the Falklands War, a fleet
of merchant vessels was deployed in the south Atlantic, to assist
the Royal Navy of the UK. These ships were rapidly converted to
their military role in various naval and civilian dockyards in the UK.
The ships included liners, tankers, RO-RO ships, offshore support
vessels and tugs.
103. Merchant vessels have been extensively used in wartime, as

hospital ships. Though most warships have rudimentary operation
theatres, the presence of a hospital ship may be the difference
between life and death in times of a war.
104. The presence of mobile repair ships is vital to sustain a naval force
at sea, in the advanced area of operation. The Offshore Patrol
Vessels (OPVs) can take up the role of these repair ships when
equipped with basic engineering and repair facilities. In the Gulf
War, for example Maritime Pre-positioning Ships (MPS) loaded with
Marine Corps supplies and equipment, from such distant places as
Guam and Diego Garcia, were deployed in Saudi Arabia.
105. The Merchant Navy has an important role to play in India’s national
and international trade. India’s large pool of personnel employed in
the merchant marine can be assets both during times of war and
otherwise. The merchant navy keeps the trade flowing smoothly
when not involved in war.
106. India’s coastline of approximately 7,600 km, with EEZ of about 2.2
million sq. km, and its location make it a maritime presence of
consequence in the global context. The Indian Navy has to
maintain a strong military vigil in the area to prevent encroachment
of its assets by neighbors. As it is required to undertake and
sustain naval operations far from its shores, the country’s
mercantile marine could play an integral role by supporting these
operations.
107. The type of ships required for all these operations would include
medium-sized oil tankers, general cargo ships, passenger liners
and container ships. The use of RO-RO ships to carry the
mechanized infantry and the armored divisions is also envisaged.
The availability of these ships for a joint exercise on a regular basis
might not be feasible due to commercial constraints. However,
periodic exercises and interaction will help.
108. India’s fortunate geographic location, astride the major sea-lanes of

the world, point to the crucial relevance of its role in ensuring the
free flow of oil and commerce from the Gulf to the Asia-Pacific
region.
109. Lastly, India’s merchant navy, though small for our needs and size,
remains a major factor in our maritime security planning. Relatively
speaking, it constitutes a little over one percent of the world
shipping tonnage, and our ships are able to carry only about a third
of our own tonnage, and our ships are able to carry only about a
third of our own foreign trade. In absolute terms however, India’s
growing fleet of over 600 ships is quite large, and operates out of
12 major and 184 minor ports. The security of these ports, our
merchant ships and the sea-lanes that they ply on represent vital
maritime interests for us.
SECTION 13
REPLENISHMENT AT SEA
110. Replenishment At Sea. The term Replenishment at Sea (RAS)

means the restocking of a ship with men, ammunition (including
missiles) provisions, stores, fuel or water. It is describes
replenishment between one ship and another when both are under
way at sea. This is used for fleet to operate for longer periods away
from shore bases. Replenishment must be accomplished in the
shortest possible time consistent with safety, because the ships
engaged are restricted in their movement and therefore more
vulnerable to attack.
111. Types & Methods of Replenishments. These are:-
(a) Beam Transfer of Solids. Heavy stores and ammunition up to

a maximum load of two tones is transferred by Heavy Jackstay.
(b) Vertical Replenishment (Vertrep). Vertrep is defined as the

use of helicopters for the transfer of stores or ammunition
between ships or between ship and shore, by day and night.
(c) Abeam Transfer of Liquids. Fuel water and lube oil can be
transferred by abeam replenishment.
(d) Astern Transfer of Liquids. Fuel only can be transferred by

astern replenishment.
(e) Light Stores and Personnel. For personnel and light stores up
to 250 kgs, the light jack stay rig is used.
(f) Post Man’s Knock. Store up to 14 kgs in weight can be

transferred by light line transfer.
(g) By Boat. Transfering of stores and personnel from ship to shore

and shore to ship and ship at sea.
112. Introduction to Heavy Jackstay. The heavy jackstay is used for

transfer for heavy loads of stores including ammunition up to a
maximum weight per load of 02 tons. The jack stay and delivery
ships inhaul are worked by winches and the receiving ship’s out-
haul worked by the warping drum of a winch.
113. Light Jackstay. The light jackstay is used for transferring,
provisions and light stores and has maximum transfer load of 250
kg. The hauling end of the jack stay is manned by at least 25 Men
(28 in high sea state) and the other end is secured by a grommet
strop to a slip in the receiving ship. The traveler block is hauled
back and forth along the jackstay by an outhaul in the receiving
ship and by an inhaul in the delivery ship manned by 06 men in
each ship. Normal working distance is 34 Meters.
******************** Picture of page No. 151
114. Station Keeping – Distance Line for Abeam Transfer. A steady

course and speed by the delivery ship and correct station keeping
by the receiving ship are most important for abeam transfer the
distance between ships is measured by a distance line. The zero
end is secured to a strong point in the guide ship with zero flag.
Flag parallel to the ship side and other end is kept taught in the
consort at a position visible from the bridge and at right angles to
the fore and aft line.
115. Sequence Of Passing Gear. As both replenishment unit/ships are
ready guide ship will continue on her steady course and speed. As
the approaching ship approach the delivery ship fire two casting
gun line on the approaching ship with casting gun line delivery ship
pass out haul, telephone line, Jack stay rope. Same time receiving
with second gun line pass distance line to the delivery ship. As the
jack stay rope reaches in the receiving ship, its grommet strop is
rigged with rigging slip, connected up signal passed between both
ships/unit. Delivery ship then hooks on test load for checking up
Jack stay rope and then continue transfer of store and personnel.
116. Disengage Procedure. As the replenishment at sea light jackstay

evolution is completed, the traveler is hauled back in the Delivery
Ship. Delivery ship checks away the jackstay rope and receiving
ship toggles the out haul in to the Jackstay rope thimble, then
receiving ship heaves the out haul and released the Jackstay rope
from the ship. Delivery ship heave the jack stay rope and out haul
paid out hand to hand by continue giving slack on out haul with
receiving. When every rope and RAS point is ready, command give
order to disconnect. All the ropes are throw in the water clearly.
117. Safety Precautions. These are as follows:-

(a) All personnel should wear no 10-dress trouser, tucked in socks
and sleeves fully down.
(b) All seamen should wear sharp seaman knife.
(c) All personnel should wear half inflated life jackets.
(d) Personnel working under dump area should wear safety
helmets.
(e) Temporary guard rail to be rigged up before lowering pmt
guardrail.
(f) No personnel should be in the bight of rope.
(g) Pass test load first.
(h) Personnel transferred by light jackstay should wear fully inflated
life jacket.
(i) All personnel should be brief and debrief before and after
evolutions.
(j) Personnel working with gear should known what to do them and
which is running and standing end.
(k) Do not make jackstay rope bar tight.
(l) Before emergency breakaway make sure that dumping area
should be clear.
SECTION 14
ORGANIZATION OF THE INDIAN ARMY
118. The Indian Army’s HQ is located in New Delhi and functions under
the Chief of Army Staff (COAS), who is responsible for the
command, control & administration as a whole. The Army is divided
into six operational commands (field armies) and one training
command, each under the command of a Lieutenant General who
has an equal status to the Vice-Chief of Army Staff (VCOAS),
working under the control of Army HQ in New Delhi.
119. Each Command HQ has two or three Corps under command. A

corps is a large HQ responsible for a sector within the jurisdiction of
a Command HQ. A Corps HQ has three or more Army Divisions
under its Command and control, depending on the operational
requirements of a Corps sector. A Corps HQ can shift from sector
to sector or even to another command zone depending on the
operational requirements. Those formations which are designed to
be mobile and have transportable weapons and equipment are
called Field Formations. Corps HQ is the highest field formation in
the Army.
Operational Commands
120. Northern Command. HQ in Udhampur, Jammu & Kashmir.
(a) XIV {14} Corps – Leh, Ladakh.
(b) XV {15} Corps – Srinagar, Kashmir.
(c) XVI {16} Corps – Ngrota, Jammu.
121. Western Command. HQ in Chandimandir, Chandigarh (Punjab).
(a) II {2} Corps – Ambala, Haryana (Strike Corps).
(b) X {10} Corps – Bhatinda, Punjab.
(c) XI {11} Corps – Jalandhar, Punjab.

122. South Western Command. HQ in Jaipur, Rajasthan.
(a) IX {9} Corps – Mamun (Pathankot), Punjab.
123. Eastern Command. HQ in Kolkota, West Bengal.
(a) III {3} Corps – Rangapahar (Dimapur), Nagaland.
(b) IV {4} Corps – Tezpur, Assam.
(c) XXXIII {33} Corps – Siliguri, West Bengal.
124. Southern Command. HQ in Pune, Maharashtra.
(a) XII {12} Corps – Jodhpur, Rajasthan.
(b) XXI {21} Corps – Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh (Strike Corps).
125. Central Command. HQ in Lucknow, Uttar Pradesh.
(a) I {1} Corps – Mathura, Uttar Pradesh (Strike Corps).
126. ARTRAC (Army Training Command). HQ in Shimla, HP.
Field Formations
127. Army Divisions. An Army Division is the largest striking force in

the field. A Division is commanded by a Major General who is
appointed as GOC or General Officer Commanding. There are the
following types of Army Divisions:-
(a) 4 RAPID Divisions.
(b) 18 Infantry Divisions.
(c) 10 Mountain Divisions.
(d) 03 Armored Divisions.
(e) 02 Artillery Divisions.

128. An Army Division has three or more Brigades under its command
and control. In the Indian Army there are:-
(a) 06 Air Defence Brigades + 2 Surface-to-Air Missile Groups.
(b) 05 Independent Armored Brigades.
(c) 15 Independent Artillery Brigades.
(d) 07 Independent Infantry Brigades.
(e) 01 Parachute Brigades.
(f) 04 Engineer Brigades.
(g) 14 Army Aviation Helicopter Units.
129. The various sub-units in the Army are:-
(a) 63 Tank Regiments.
(b) 07 Airborne Battalions.
(c) 200 Artillery Regiments.
(d) 360 Infantry Battalions + 5 Para (SF) Battalions.
(e) 40 Mechanized Infantry Battalions.
(f) 20 Combat Helicopter Units.
(g) 35+ Air Defence Regiments.

SECTION 15
ORGANIZATION OF THE INDIAN AIR FORCE
130. The Indian Air Force is today the world’s fourth largest, well-
equipped and professionally trained, smartly efficient and with an
élan, second to none. The Indian Air Force is headed by the Chief
of the Air Staff, with its Headquarters in New Delhi. The Air Force is
organized into seven commands viz five Operational Commands
and two Functional Commands.
131. There are five Operational Air Commands as follows:-
(a) Western Air Command. With Headquarters in Delhi being the

prime one and responsible for air operations from Kashmir
southwards to Rajasthan and including the capital and the
Punjab, with an Operations Group dedicated for Jammu &
Kashmir including Ladakh.
(b) Central Air Command. Based at Allahabad, encompasses

most of the Indo-Ganjetic plain.
(c) Eastern Air Command. Based at Shillong, is responsible for

Bengal, Assam, the eastern states of Arunachal Pradesh,
Meghalaya, Mizoram and the others bordering area on Tibet,
Bangladesh and Burma.
(d) South Western Air Command. Based at Jodhpur, is

responsible for air operations in most of Rajasthan, southwards
through Gujarat to Saurashtra and the Kutch area.
(e) Southern Air Command. Was formed in July 1984 with HQs at
Trivandrum and has, geographically, the largest territory, from
the Deccan plateau area to the southern tip of the peninsula
and including island territories of Lakshwadeep and the A & N
Islands.
132. The IAF has the following two Functional Commands:-
(a) Training Command. Has its Headquarters at Bangalore, with

the majority of flying and ground training establishments located
in Southern India.
(b) Maintenance Command. Operates from Nagpur in Central

India.
133. The five Operational Commands through administrative Wings,
control some 45 fixed-wing squadrons, 20 helicopter units and
numerous Surface-to-Air missile (SAM) squadrons, with unit
establishments varying from 12 to 18 aircraft. This represents total
aircraft strength of nearly 1,700 including training and support
types, manned by some 120,000 personnel.
134. Aircraft of the IAF. The aircrafts that are in use in the Air Force are
SU-30, Mirage-2000, MIG-29, MIG-27, MIG-23, MF, MIG-21, BIS,
Jaguar, IL-76, AN-32, AVRO, Dornier, Boeing 737-200, MI-26, MI-
25, MI-17, Chetak, Cheetah.
CHAPTER XIII
SEAMANSHIP
SECTION 1
RIGGING
Ropes
1. Types of Ropes. There are three types of ropes:-
(a) Natural Fibre Cordage Rope. Fibre is combed into long even
ribbons. Ribbons which are twisted to yarn process pinning. Than
a number of yarns are twisted to make strand. And finally strands
are laying or closing to make a rope. Rope is right handed or left
handed lay.
(b) Man Made Fibre. Polyamide is produced from coal. Remainder is

produced from oil. Most man made fibre is made from either
continuous filaments or yarn of staple fibres. But polypropylene
rope can be made from multifilament, monofilament, staple or film
fibre.
(c) Steel Wire Rope. A wire rope is constructed of a number of small

wires which extend continuously through out the entire length.
These wires are laid up in to strands and the strands themselves
are laid up to from the rope. The wire ropes supplied to the Navy
fall are:-
(i) Steel Wire Rope (SWR).
(ii) Flexible Steel Wire Rope (FSWR).
(iii) Extra Special Flexible Steel Wire Rope (ESFSWR).
(iv) Flexible Mild Steel Wire Rope (FMSWR).
General Characteristics
2. Natural Fibre Rope.
(a) Manila Rope. When new and untreated it is a deep golden

brown in color, the rope is flexible, durable, strong and
impervious to salt water and stretch up wet to wear and tear. It
stretches less marked with one black yarn in each of two
strands and used for ammunition whips and as a check stopper
for towing and light jackstay.
(b) Sisal Rope. When new and untreated it is hairy and of a pale
straw color, strong as manila but not as flexible durable or
resistant to wear and weather, marked with one red yarn in one
strand used for slip rope during RAS,
(c) Coir Rope. It is very hairy and dark brown in color. It is weakest
rope of all cordage rope. It is flexible, light and springs used for
manufactured of fenders an short mats. Marked with one yellow
yarn in one strand.
(d) Hemp Rope. It is very much soften than the fibres described
above. It is stronger and more flexible than Manila. But due to
scarcity and high costs, has been withdrawn from service.
Marked with one yellow yarn in one strand.
3. Man Made Fibre Rope.
(a) Polymide. Approximately 2½ times stronger than manila of

equivalent size. It will stretch approximately 25% of its length
and has excellent recovery. It does not float. It is used for towing
hawsers and anti-shock strops. Because of its elastic properties,
it is marked with one green yarn in one strand.
(b) Polyester. Approximately 2 times stronger than manila of

equivalent size. It stretches approximately 35% before parting. It
will stretch 14% of its length and has excellent use for RAS line,
safety net, signal hail yard and picking up rope. It is marked with
one blue yarn in one strand.
(c) Polypropylene. This rope is nearly twice as strong as manila of

equivalent size and lightest in weight of the man made fibre. It
stretches 44% before parting and it will stretch 17% of its length.
Being a floating rope it is used for messenger, associated with
towing hawser, also used for boat rope, life line and recovery
line. Mark with one brown yarn in one strand on rope wholly
color brown.
(d) Polyethylene. About one and half times as strong as manila of

equivalent size. It stretches 33% before parting. This rope is
also a floating lien and easily visible, is used in ships diving
operations. Marked with one orange yarn in one strand or rope
wholly colored orange.
(e) Parafil. These ropes are not affected by water, will not cored or
rot and have an energy absorption 2½ - 3½ times that of SWR
equivalent breaking load. Used for standing rigging as guard
rail.
(f) Aramid. These ropes are nearly 6 times as strong manila of

equivalent size. Aramid Ropes are very susceptible to damage if
run through block sheaves. It is used for dressing lines.
(g) Plaited Rope. The rope is constructed of eight strands arranged

in four pairs. Two pairs as left handed lay and two pairs as right
handed lay. This arrangement is known as four squares or
crossing / re-crossing of strands.
4. Steel Wire Rope.
(a) 7x7 And 7x19. This is suitable for standing rigging such as
shrouds or guys when it is not required to be as flexible as the
wire rope used for running rigging. Its strands are made up as
small number as large gauge wires wound round a wire core
and the strands themselves are made up around a main core.
(b) Steel Wire Rope. This is suitable for lashings or temporary

guard rails on a ship in refit. To make it flexible it necessitates
sacrificing a certain portion of its strength and each strand
consist as a certain number of medium gauge wires would
round a large fibre core.
(c) Steel Wire Rope -16x19, 6x24, 6,26, 6,36 and 6x41. This
range of ropes has greater strength and flexibility and is used
for running, rigging, mooring, slinging and towing in certain
auxiliary craft. The stands are constructed of a number of small
gauge wires made up around a fibre core.
5. Rope Work Terms.
(a) To Heave. To throw a rope or to pull on a rope or cable either

by hand or power.
(b) Heave. The order to give a strong pull together.
(c) Heave In. The order to heave in on a capstan or winch.

(d) Two Six Heave. An order to men hauling on a rope to make
them heave together, repeated as necessary.
(e) To Haul. To pull by hand.
(f) Avast. Order to stop hauling.
(g) Hold Fast. An order to hold rope under strain so as to keep it

from moving.
(h) To Hoist. To lift.
(i) Hoist Away. The order to haul away on a rope when hoisting
something with it.
(j) Marry. The order to bring two ropes together side by side and
handle them as one.
(k) Lower Away. The order to lower steadily.
(l) To Check. To ease out a rope steadily by hand keeping a strain

on it.
(m) Handsomely. Slowly with care.
(n) To Veer. To pay or ease out a cable or hawser from the cable
holder or capstan when these are controlled by their motors.
(o) Check Away. The order to ease a rope steadily by hand while
keeping a strain on it.
(p) To Snub. It means suddenly to restrain a rope or cable when it

is running out.
(q) To Surge. To allow a hawser to ease out by its own weight or

by the strain on the outboard end.
(r) Belay. When a rope will have to be cast off while still under
strain it can not be, secured with a bend of a hitch. It is therefore
belayed to clear staghorn or bollard.
(s) Standing Part. That part of the rope which is made fast to a
block or a spar.
(t) Bight. The middle part of a length of rope.
(u) Bend. The temporary joining of one rope to another.

6. Preparation of Ropes for Use. A rope is normally kept ready for
use by any of the following methods:-
(a) Coiling Down. Any rope is always to be coiled in respect to the

lay of the rope, otherwise the rope will get snarled, for this
reason rope of right-hand lay is always coiled down right
handed, and rope of left-hand lay is always coiled down left-
handed.
(b) Fake Down a Rope. A rope which may have to be paid out
quickly should be faked down in as long fakes as stowage
space allows. Care should be taken that each bight at the end of
a fake is laid under that immediately preceding it to ensure a
clear run.
*************** Picture of page No. 162
(c) Cheese Down. When a net stow is required for a short end of
rope, it may be cheesed down.
*************** Picture of page No. 162

SECTION 2
BENDS AND HITCHES
7. Bends, Hitches and Knots. All knots, bends and hitches reduce
the strength of a rope in that portion of it where the knot, bend or
hitch is made. This reduction varies from 40 to 60%, and it should
be born, in mind when putting a load on a knotted rope.
(a) A Bend. A Bend is a method of temporarily joining two ropes.
(b) A Hitch. A Hitch is a method of temporarily joining a rope to a

structure of ring.
(c) A Knot. A Knot is the intertwining of stands or smaller parts of

rope(s) to prevent a rope unreeving, or to provide a hand hold, a
weight or a stopper, or any part of a rope.
8. Elements of bend and hitches consist of a combination of two or

more of the elements. These are as follows:-
(a) A Bight.
(b) A Sound Turn.
(c) A Half Hitch.
(d) A Twist.
(e) An Overhand Knot.
****** Picture of page No. 163

9. The type of knots generally in use are:-
(a) Reef Knot. The reef knot consists of two overhand knot made
consecutively and is used as a common tie for bending together
two ropes of approximately equal size.
(b) Figure Of Eight Knot. This knot is used to prevent a rope

unreeving through an eye or a block.
(c) Clove Hitch. A clove hitch is used to secure a rope to a spar,

sail or similarly fittings, it will slip along the spar or sail if
subjected to a side ways pull.
(d) Rolling Hitch. This hitch is used for securing a rope to a spar
when the pull is expected to be from one side or the other, and
to another rope under strain. It is made by passing the end twice
round the spar or rope, each turn crossing the standing part. A
half hitch on the opposite side completes the hitch. Always pass
the two turns on the side from which the pull is expected.

(e) Timber Hitch. This hitch is used for securing a rope’s end.
(f) Bowline. This is most useful knot for making temporary eyes in
ropes of all sizes. It is used for bending a heaving line to a
hawser or as a life line round a man’s waist and for a great
variety of similar purpose.
(g) Bowline On The Bight. As its name implies, the bowline is

made on the bight, the first operations in its formation being the
same as for a simple bowline. It is used for lowering a man from
aloft or over the ship side. The shorter bight being placed under
this arms and the long one under his buttocks.

(h) Round Turn and Two Half Hitch. This combination is used to
secure a heavy load to a spar, ring or shackle such as the buoy
shackle of a mooring buoy. It will never jam and can be cast off
quickly. The end should be slopped to the standing part.
SECTION 3
TACKLES
10. Definition. A tackle is a purchase consisting of a rope rove through

two or more blocks in such a way that the force of any pull applied
to its hauling parts is increased by an amount depending up on the
number of sheaves in the blocks and manner in which the rope is
rove through them.
11. Uses of Tackles. Tackles are used for lifting weights and to tighten
the ropes with minimum manpower. These are combinations of
blocks joined together with a rope. They reduce the energy required
to accomplish a job by reducing the friction.
12. Parts of a Tackle.
(a) Standing Part. That part of a rope which is made fast to a mast,
deck, block of a tackle or any other fitting.
(b) Hauling Part. That part of a rope or a tackle which is hauled

upon.
(c) Running Part. That part of a rope or a tackle which runs

through the blocks.
(d) Fall. The rope of a tackle.
(e) Running End. That part of a length of rope which first runs out
from a coil, take orreel or through a block or fairlead.
SECTION 4
FUNDAMENTALS OF STEERING
Conning and Steering
13. One of the most important duties of a seaman is to be able to steer

well, either by sight on the object ordered, or by compass. This
ability can only be acquired by experience. A ship is manoeuvred
by the combined use of her engines and rudder(s). when underway
and going ahead, the ship’s speed at which her propellers rotate, in
revolutions per minute, or, in the case of Controllable Pitch
Propellers (CPP), by maintaining constant revolutions and altering
the pitch of the propeller blades. Normally warships are fitted with
two rubbers which work in unison and are used for maintaining or
altering course.
14. In a warship, the Captain, Officer of the Watch (OOW) or the

Navigating Officer (NO) cons the ship by giving wheel or engine
orders from the Compass Platform on the Bridge. The wheel orders
are applied by the helmsman and the engine orders are either
applied directly or passed to the Ship Control or engine room to be
applied.
15. In modern warships and merchant ships, the helmsman is stationed

on the Bridge and steers the ship either by a miniature wheel or by
a Handle-Bar similar to an aircraft joystick. Engine speed and CPP
controls are also sited on the Bridge and together with the steering
control they form part of an Integrated Ship Control System. The
console also generally includes facilities for Automatic steering
(Auto – Pilot) controlled by one of the ship’s Gyro Compass.
16. In older ships, the wheel and telegraphs to transmit engine and
revolution orders are positioned in a Wheelhouse which may be
sited just below the Bridge or well down in the ship to provide
protection. Amplified intercom systems and telephones are then
provided for communication between the Bridge and Wheelhouse.
17. The movement of the steering wheel or the handle-bar sets in

motion the steering mechanism which turns the rudder(s). When
the ship is moving ahead, the rudder turns the ship by swinging her
stern away from, and her bows towards, the direction desired; it has
the opposite effect when the ship is moving astern.
18. Rudder Angle. The greater the angle between the rudder and the
fore-and-aft line of the ship, the quicker she will swing and the
smaller would be her turning circle. A ship is usually designed to
allow for a maximum rudder angle of 35 degrees each side of the
midships position.
19. The movement of the rudder is indicated by a pointer which moves

over a scale graduated either side of midships to the maximum
rudder angle. The control should be moved steadily until the
required rudder angle has been put on. Any desired rudder angle
can be put on, up to the maximum when the wheel or handle-bar,
and rudder, are said to be hard over. Normally the maximum rudder
angle is limited to 5 degrees less than the maximum either way.
Steering Orders
20. It is most important that all steering orders should be given clearly
and in the standard form. It is equally important that they should be
acknowledged in the standard form and obeyed correctly and in
orderly fashion. Orders for an alteration of course always start with
the direction and are immediately followed by the Rubber Angle.
21. The following example shows the orders, replies and reports for an
alteration of course from 008 degrees to 305 degrees.
Order Reply Report
‘Midships’ ‘Midships, Sir’ ‘Wheel’s a’midships, Sir’
‘Port twenty’ ‘Port twenty, Sir’ ‘Twenty of port wheel on, Sir’
‘East to ten’ ‘East to ten, Sir’ ‘Ten of port wheel on, Sir’
‘Midships’ ‘Midships, Sir’ ‘Wheel’s a’midships, Sir’
‘Starboard ten’ ‘Starboard ten, Sir’ ‘Ten of starboard wheel on, Sir’
‘Midships’ ‘Midships, Sir’ ‘Wheel’s a’midships Sir’
‘Steady’ ‘Steady, three-zero-six, Sir’
‘Steer three-zero-five’ ‘Steer three-zero-five, Sir’ ‘Course, Sir, three-zero-five’

22. Immediately after an alteration of course is made, the order
‘Midships’ may be given. This serves the double purpose of
ensuring that any rudder angle which may be on is taken off, and of
warning the helmsman that an alteration of course is coming.
23. Carrying Wheel. Unless sea and wind are right ahead, if the
rudder is kept amidships, she will usually wander off her course
owing to the pressure of the wind on her superstructure or the force
of the waves on either end of her hull. To counter this tendency the
helmsman has to apply a constant small amount of wheel.
Conning and Steering Positions
24. Alternative positions from which the ship can be conned and
steered are provided for use if the primary positions are put out of
action are:-
(a) Bridge. It refers to the position in the upper portion of the bridge
structure from where the ship is controlled by the Captain.
(b) Emergency Conning Position (ECP). A position well

separated from the Compass platform, from which the ship may
be conned when the bridge is out of action. It is usually sited aft
of the bridge in the midships or after superstructure.
(c) Forward Steering Position (FSP). The compartment designed

as the Primary steering Position in large ships and in some
older frigates.
(d) Wheelhouse. The primary steering position or any

compartment from which the ship is steered, other than the
bridge.
(e) Aft Steering Position (ASP). This is the position at which a

mechanical wheel fro local control of power steering is fitted in a
steering compartment aft.
(f) Hand Steering Position (HSP). This is the space which

contains the hand pump for operating the steering gear by hand.
In small ships it is also called Tiller Flat.
(g) Emergency Hand – Control Steering Position. The position at

any of the power steering gear pumps where they are fitted with
direct manual control for emergency use.
SECTION 5
BOAT PULLING
25. Types of Boats. Boats may be distinguished by their construction

open or decked and by their means of Propulsion. The boats are
classified on basis of means of propulsion are:-
(a) Pulling Boats. A pulling boat is an open boat and is propelled

by oars. Puling boats may be single banked or double banked.
In a single banked boat there is one oar man on each thwart
and he sits on the side furthest from the blade of his oar. In a
double banked boat two oarsmen sit on each thwart and each
oarsman pulls an oar on his on side.
(b) Sailing Boats. A sailing boat is a boat whose primary means of

propulsion is by sail, but she may also be equipped for pulling or
with some of mechanical propulsion in which case she is known
as an auxiliary sailing boat.
(c) Power Boats. Power boats are driven by internal combustion

engines and therefore known as Motor boats. They may be
classified as inboard or outboard according to the position of the
motor. They may also be classified according to speed (fast,
medium or slow speed).
26. Pulling Orders. When a pulling boat is under way any order to the
oarsman except hold water is obeyed on completing one full stroke
after the order is given. All such orders should be given at the
moment when the blades of the oars are in the water. On obeying a
pulling order the crew takes its timing from the Stroke Oarsman,
who is usually next to the senior sailor to the coxswain. When
‘PORT’ or ‘STARBOARD’ is included in a pulling order, it refers to
the bank of oars on the port or starboard side of the boat,
respectively. Before saluting by tossing or laying on the oars, the
cautions ‘Stand-by to toss oars’ or ‘Stand-by for oars’ should be
given.
(a) Ship Your Oars. This is the order to place the oars in the
rowlocks or crutches for pulling.
(b) Shove Off. This is the order to shove the boat off with looms of
the oars from the ship or landing place alongside which she is
lying or from bottom of the boat if grounded.
(c) Give Way Together. This is the order to start pulling and it is
obeyed together by the whole crew.
(d) Oars. This is anorder to cease pulling.
(e) Hold Water. This is the order to reduce or stop the way of the
boat by holding the oars at right angles to the boat and with
their blades in water.
(f) Stroke Together. This is the order for all to give one stroke
together.
(g) Back Together. This is the order to back water together by

pushing on the looms of the oars instead of pulling.
(h) Easy All. This is the order to pull less vigorously so that the
speed of the boat will be reduced. If the boat is being turned the
order ‘Easy Port’ or ‘Easy Starboard’ may be given.
(i) Mind Your Oars. This is the warning to the crew to keep the
blades of their oar clear from obstructions.
(j) Eyes in the Boat. This is an order to the crew to keep their
gaze from wondering aboard and to pay attention to their
duties.
(k) Bow. This is an order to the bow man to boat his oar and be
ready to fend off the bows of boat with his boat hook.
(l) Way Enough. This is the order which, when given in a single
banked boat requires to pull one more stroke and pass the
looms of their oars over their head and to boat the oars.
(m) Boat Your Oars. This is the order to unship the oars from
crutches and lay them fore and aft in the boat on their
respective sides.
27. Manning the Boat. The crew should be detailed for their thwarts
before manning the boat in a single banked boat the bowman, no 3
and stroke pull starboard oars and sit on the port side of their
thwarts, the No 2 and No 4 pull port oars and sit on the starboard
side of their thwarts. Each oarsman should sit squarely and upright
on his thwart. His stretcher should be adjusted so that when his feet
are resting on it his knees are should be adjusted so that when his
feet are resting on it his knees are slightly bent; his heels should be
together and his toes turned onwards at an angle of 45 degrees.
The oar should be held with the hands from 30 – 50 cm apart. The
grip on the oar should be firm but light, with the fingers over the oar,
the thumb underneath and the inner wrist slightly arched. Both
elbows should be close to the sides and of the body and the back
should be straight. This is the position of the ‘Oars’.
Correct Use of an Oar
28. At the order ‘Oars Forward’ each man bends forward from the hips,
keeping his arms and back straight, until his trunk is between 30
degrees and 40 degrees from the vertical. In this position, the oars
should be at an angle of about 30 degrees from the fore-and-aft line
of the boat, with the blades just above the water and slightly over
the vertical (Positions 9, 10 and 1).
29. At the order ‘Give Way Together’, each man lowers the blade of his
oar into the water by raising his hands sufficiently; he then pulls the
loom by driving his feet against the stretcher and, while keeping his
arms and back straight, swinging his trunk backwards until it is
about 10 degrees to 20 degrees beyond the vertical (positions 2, 3
and 4). The end of the stroke is made, with the trunk still in this
position, by bending the elbows the pulling the loom of the oar in to
the chest with the arm and shoulder muscles, which should bring
the blade of the oar just clear of the water at an angle of 45
degrees with the vertical (position 5). These four stages are
continuous.
************* Picture of page No.173
30. At the order ‘Oars’ the recovery is made by dropping the hands
sufficiently to bring the oar to the horizontal and dropping the wrists
to feather the oar so that its blade is horizontal. The arms are then
thrust forward and the trunk is swung upright by the stomach
muscles until the position of ‘oars’ is again reached, this movement
being helped by pulling with the legs against the straps which hold
the feet to the stretcher (positions 6, 7 and 8).
31. This sequence is continued until all the crew is proficient in

handling their oars.
SECTION 6
SAILING
32. Parts of Sail.
(a) Head. Upper side of lug sail.
(b) Foot. Lower side of any sail.
(c) Luff. The forward edge of sail.
(d) Leach. The after edge of sail.
(e) Peck. After upper corner of a lug sail.
(f) Throat. Forward upper corner of a sail.
(g) Tack. Lower forward corner of a sail.
(h) Clew. Lower after corner of a sail.
(i) Boom. The spar to which the foot of any sail is bent.
(j) Eyelets. The eyes worked into the head of or foot of a sail for
lacing it to spar.
(k) Fore Sail. The sail set immediately before the foremast.
(l) More Stay. A rope leading forward from the mast head to assist
in preventing the mast from falling aft.
(m)Gaff Sail. A four sided sail the head of which is bent to a gaff.
(n) Gaff Top Sail. A triangular set sail between a gaff and the mast
head.
********************* Picture of page No. 175
(o) Halyard. A rope by which a sail is hoisted or lowered.
(p) Loose Footed Sail. A sail that has no boom at its foot.
(q) Lug Sail. A four sided sail the head of which is bent to a yard.
(r) Mizzen. The sail set on the mizzen mast.
(s) Reef. To reef a sail is to reduce the area, it after to the wind in
order to prevent the boat from heeling over too far and getting
swamped or capsizing.
(t) Bolt Rope. The roping sewn on the side of the sail.
(u) Brail. A rope which encircles a loose footed sail and has its
bight seized to leach of a sail.
(v) Genoa. A large triangular sail set in place of the fore sail, its
clew will reaches abaft the main mast.
(w) Jip. Any head sail set before the foresail, if there are two, they
are called the inner jib and the outer jib. If three, the foremost
one is called the flying jib.
(x) Spinnaker. A large ballon type sail with luff and leach of equal
length which may be used in place of a fore sail when the wind
is abaft the beam.
(y) Storm Sails. Special sails are used in very strong wind instead
of a boats normal suit of sails. They are smaller and made of
heavier canvas than the normal sails.
33. Terms Used In Sailing.
(a) Up Helm. Means to move the tiller towards the weather side of the
boat.
(b) Down Helm. Means to move the tiller towards the Lee side of the
boat.
(c) To Back A Sail. A sail is said to be backed when it is trimmed to

catch the wind.
(d) Bearing Away. Altering course away from the wind until the boat is
on her new course.
(e) Beating. When the destination of a sailing boats lies directly up

wind sea beats to windward by sailing close hauled in a series of
alternate tack.
(f) Close Hauled. A boat is close hauled when she is sailing as close
as possible to the wind direction.
(g) Gybing. A boat running before the wind and wishing to alter to a
course which necessitates putting the stern of the boat through the
wind aft.
1. REACHING WITH THE WIND ON THE STARBOARD SIDE.
2. RUNNING WITH THE WIND ON THE STARBOARD SIDE.
3. GYBING.
4. RUNNING WITH THE WIND ON THE PORT SIDE.
5. REACHING WITH THE WIND ON THE PORT SIDE.
6. SAILING CLOSE – HAULED ON THE PORT TACK.
7. TACKING FROM THE PORT TACK TO THE STBD TACK.
8. SAILING CLOSE – HAULED ON THE STARBOARD TACK.
(h) In Iron. A boat is in irons when she fails to go about from one track
to the other sand lies head to wind unable to pay off on either track.
(i) Port And Starboard Tracks. A boat is on Port track when she is
close hauled with the wind on her Port side, and on the Starboard
track when she is close hauled with the wind on her starboard side.
(j) Reaching. A boat is reaching when she is sailing free with the wind
abeam or before the beam, but is not sailing close hauled.
(k) Running. A boat is running when she is sailing with the wind abaft
the beam.
(l) Sailing Free. A boat is sailing free whenever her sails are filled and
she is not sailing close hauled.
Rigging a Whaler
34. The sails comprise a foresail, a standing – lug mainsail and a

triangular mizzen the foot of which is laced to a boom. The
mainmast is stepped in the keelson, held by an iron clamp to the
second inwart, and stayed by twp shrouds set up with lanyards to
eyeplates in the gunwales and by a forestay of wire rope secured to
the stay shackle on the stem. The Mizzen Mast passes through a
specially fitted crosspiece and is stepped in the hog abaft the stern
benches; it is not stayed. The boom of the mizzen can be triced up
by a topping lift. And its heel is hinged to the mizzen mast.

Rigging an Enterprise (EC) Class Dinghy
35. EC Class dinghy is used for recreational sailing and is made of

GRP. It has two sails viz Foresail and a Mainsail. It is rigged as
shown in the diagram below:

SECTION 7
ANCHOR AND ANCHOR CABLE
36. Anchor. An Anchor is a hook, attached to length of chain or rope

called a cable by which a ship or boat can be held temporarily to
seabed in comparatively in shallow water.
37. Parts of Anchor.
38. The following types of anchors are used in the Navy:-
(a) Admiralty Pattern Anchor. This Anchor is much older than

the Admiralty itself and was long considered by seaman to
afford the greatest holding pull i.e. 3-3½ times its own
weight. It is used mainly for anchoring, danbuoy and markers
and occasionally as Boat’s Anchor. When the anchor is let
go, the stock comes to rest horizontally on the bottom as the
flukes are set at right angles to the stock, the lower fluke
digs into the bottom and holds. Its disadvantage is that,
because the upper fluke sticks up from the bottom the
anchor may well be dislodged through being fouled by the
bight of the cable. It is also dangerous to let go in shallow
water, because the boat may impale herself on upper fluke
during low tide.
(b) Admiralty Standard Stockless (ASS) Anchor. This type of

anchor will soon no longer be in use in the service. However,
it is still fitted in a few of older surface ships, submarines and
as a stream Anchor in some Fleet Auxiliaries. The maximum
holding pull is about the same as that of the Admiralty
pattern. As the Anchor is dragged along the bottom the
weight of the flukes and the effect of the tripping palm tilt
both flukes downwards so that they dig in to the bottom.
(c) AC (Admiralty Class) 14. The Admiralty instituted a series

of the tests aimed at improving the ratio between the holding
pull and Anchor weight. These tests resulted in a major
advance in Anchor design and led to the development of AC
Anchor. The ratio of holding pull to Anchor weight 10:1. It is
designed to quickly bite and will achieve maximum holding
power after dragging two shank lengths.

(d) AC 16 A and 17 Anchors. The stowage of an anchor in a
submarine has always been difficult, and with the
introduction of high speed, heavy, nuclear powered vessels
the requirement for an Anchor which when stowed is flush
with the hull and completely closes the hull opening has
become important. The Anchor needed to be worked blind,
by remote control. The AC 16A was designed for stowage in
the bottom of the hull. the holding pull to anchor weight ratio
of the AC 12 anchor is 2.6:1 in mud and 3.6:1 in sand,
shingle and clay. The AC 17 anchor has a holding pull of
about 7 times its own weight.
(e) Stocked Close Stowing (Dan Forth) Anchor. The stocked

close stowing anchor, fitted in older minor was vessel,
resembles a lightly built stockless Anchor, both in
appearance and method of operation, but it has a stock
passing through the crown to prevent the anchor rolling
when it flukes dig in to the bottom. The ratio between holding
power and weight increases as the size decreases. It fits
neatly in to the hawse pipe and can be secured as efficiently
as a stockless Anchor. It is suitable to be used as bower
anchor in smaller vessels such as coastal and inshore
minesweepers.
(f) CQR (Chattam Quick Release Anchors). This anchor also

has a better holding pull than the older type of anchors. The
holding pull to weight ratio increases as the size decreases.
It is generally used for smaller craft since it is difficult to stow
in the hawsepipe. The sharp point of the fluke can damage
to the hull when weighing.
Anchor Cable
39. The anchor cable of warships is made of studded chain, because

chain can withstand the wear and tear imposed on a ship’s cable
and the studs in the link strengthen them and prevent the cable
from kinking. Studded chain cable is made in lengths of 15 and 7½
fathoms called ‘Shackles’ and ‘Half-Shackles’ of cable respectively.
A ship’s bower cable is usually made up of four half-shackles and a
number of shackles. The half-shackles are usually inserted in pairs,
one at the outboard end next to the anchor and the other midway
between the outboard and inboard ends.
40. There are different types of ship’s cable as follows:-
(a) Grade 1. Non-ferrous manufactured from copper based

material, usually referred to as aluminum bronze. It is
supplied to the mine counter measure vessels and the
precise composition of the material is dictated by the
magnetic signature constraint of the class of vessel.
(b) Grade 2. Forged Steel. Supplied to the majority of ships in

the fleet.
(c) Grade 3. Forged Steel. A higher grade steel, and

consequently a stronger then grade 2.
41. Most warships are supplied with Forged Steel (FS) cable, except
for minesweepers, which require non-magnetic cable. It is 40%
stronger than Wrought Iron cable and can therefore be smaller and
higher for the same breaking strength. The links forming each
length of the able are of uniform size and are called Common Links,
but those at each end of each length, which are required to take
lugged shackles, are stepped up in size to take the joining or
anchor shackles.
42. Marking of a Cable. The shackle and joining shackles of a cable

are numbered consecutively from its outer to its inner end, the first
joining shackle being that which joins the first and second shackle
together. To assist in identifying the joining shackles, when it is
being worked, the cable is marked every joining shackle except the
one between two half shackle is painted white. One link on each
side of joining shackle is also painted white and marked with a
number of turns of seizing wire around the stud corresponding to
the number of the joining shackle. Cable marking should be
checked and remarked as necessary whenever weighing.
MARKING OF CABLE
NOTE:- CABLE IS MARKED FROM OUTER END TO INNER END

WHITE PAINT IS USED TO MARK THE SHACKLES. MOUSING
WIRE IS USED MARK THE SHACKLES TO IDENTIFY IN THE
NIGHT.
SECTION 8
BOATSWAIN’S CALL
Piping and the Boatswain’s Call
43. Piping is a naval method of passing orders and information, and

every seaman should know how to use a Boatswain’s Call and how
to pipe an order. Orders thus passed are known as Pipes.
44. Traditionally, in the English bygone era a Boatswain’s Call was

used for passing orders. The Boatswain’s Call and chain are the
badge of office of the Chief Boatswain’s Mate. QMs and
Boatswain’s mates. The expression to pipe means, generally to
make the sound of the Boatswain’s Call and to give the spoken
order which may qualify it. Some pipes, however, are orders in
themselves and do not require any verbal addition.
45. A Boatswain’s Call can be tuned by scarping away and enlarging

the wind edge of the hole in the buoy, until it will sound if the mouth
of the gun is held directly into a moderate wind.
46. The various pipes used in the Navy are as follows:-
(a) The Still (No 1). It is used to call all the hands to attention as a
mark of respect or to order silence on any occasion.
(b) Carry On (No 2). It follows, the Still pipe to allow the personnel
to resume their work.
(c) The Hail (No 3). It is used to attract the attention of a particular
person in an unobtrusive manner. Eg OOD, EXO etc.
(d) Pipe the Side (No 13). It is used for piping the side.
(e) Special Call (No 12). Precedes the calling of the hands.
CHAPTER XIV
NAVAL COMMUNICATION
SECTION 1
SEMAPHORE
1. It is a visual means of communication, which provides a rapid

means for passing messages over short distances during daylight.
(a) Semaphore Code. The different semaphore signs are made by

moving one or two hand-flags so that they form various angles
with the perpendicular. It is essential that each angle be formed
correctly, as good communication depends upon accuracy in
this respect.
(b) Alphabet and Special signs. The alphabet and the special
signs are shown below. It should be noted that there are no
special signs for numerals, which are always spelt out. The
numeral sign is used to indicate that the numerals that follow
are to be recorded as digits.
(i) Answering Sign. By making ‘C’.
(ii) Attention Sign. By making ‘U’ and arms waved up and

down.
(iii) Direction Sign. By making ‘J’.
(iv) Front Sign. Made by crossing both flags in front of body (to
indicate the end of group or word).
(v) Error Sign. Made by succession of E’s.
(vi) Numeral Sign. Right hand at ‘D’ position, left hand at ‘E’
position (Numerals follows).
(c) Prosigns Used in Semaphore. Prosign is a signal letter or a

combination of letters which are transmitted as a single
character to convey a specific meaning. Some prosigns which
are used in Semaphore and their use are given below:-
(i) BT - Break
(ii) KN - ( Open Brackets
(iii) MIM - Comma

(iv) KK - ) Close Brackets
(v) AAA - Full Stop
(vi) DU - Hyphen
(vii) XE - Slant
(viii) B - More to follow
(ix) WB - Word before
(x) WA - Word After
(xi) II - Separative Sign
(xii) AR - End of transmission
2. Learning Semaphore. How to Remember?
(a) 1st Circle. A to G (Single arm signs).
(b) 2nd Circle. H to N (Omitting J, Right hand at A position).
(c) 3rd Circle. O to S (Right hand at B position).
(d) 4th Circle. T, U, Y (Right hand at C position).
(e) 5th Circle. J, V (Right hand at D position).
(f) To complete. W, X, Z.
SECTION 2
SIMPLE VOICE PROCEDURE AS USED IN NAVY
7. When signaling by voice, greatest care is to be taken that the

messages kept short and to the point. Voice procedure is simple
and easily understood. It is most important that this procedure is
used as all times. Messages transmitted by voice are not invariably
written down, but whenever practicable a short note of their
purpose should be made. Speech should be clear and slow with
natural emphasis on each word. Messages should normally, should
be spoken in natural phrases and not word by word. The phonetic
alphabet and pronunciation of figures are to be used when
applicable.
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
FLAG SIGNALLING
3. This involves the use of flags and pennants displayed from

halyards and is employed by ships and shore stations. It is limited
to daylight use and to comparatively short distances.
4. Indian Navy – Meanings of Common Flags.
BRAVO - In boat – I am carrying fuel or explosive.

- In Harbor – Transferring fuel or explosive.
Gunnery Practice.
By firing ship – Firing commence.
By target ship – Target ready.
FOXTROT - I am operating aircraft.
GOLF - At sea – I am the Guide.

In Harbor by Ship:-
Alongside – I am ready to receive you
alongside.
Coming alongside – I am ready to come
alongside you.
KILO - I am operating Helicopter.
MIKE - In Boat. I am carrying stretcher patient

In Harbor. Medical duty ship.
OSCAR - Man overboard.
PAPA - All personnel/boats belonging to this ship

return to the ship immediately.
ROMEO - In Harbor. Ready duty ship.
UNIFORM - In Harbor. I am anchoring or weighing anchor.
VICTOR - In Harbor. This ship is open for visitors.
YANKEE - In Harbor. I am keeping visual watch.
FLAG 4 - In Harbor. Under water divers are operating.
FLAG 5 - Have break down or Not Under Command

(NUC).
SECTION 4
MORSE CODE
5. When used with radio this is commonly known as Wireless

Telegraphy (W/T). The construction of the Morse Code and its
symbology are given below:-
(a) Alphabets.
(b) Numerals.
SECTION 5
PHONETIC ALPHABETS
6. When the letters of the alphabet are read out it will be observed
that some of them sound very similar especially on radio telephone.
This can cause confusion when important messages are being
passed. In order to eliminate this ambiguity, phonetic alphabets are
used as follows:-
A – Alfa J – Juliet S – Sierra
B – Bravo K – Kilo T – Tango
C – Charlie L – Lima U – Uniform
D – Delta M – Mike V – Victor
E – Echo N – November W – Whiskey
F – Foxtrot O – Oscar X – X-Ray
G – Golf P – Papa Y – Yankee
H – Hotel Q – Quebec Z – Zulu
I – India R – Romeo
SEMAPHORE ALPHABET

CHAPTER XV
NAVIGATION
SECTION 1
NAVIGATION – ITS PURPOSE AND COMMON PRINCIPLES
Introduction
1. Navigation is the process of planning and carrying out the

movement, transport of all kinds from one place to another by sea,
in the air, in the land or in space. The navigation of all waterborne
craft is called Marine Navigation. We can say that the navigation is
the business of conducting a craft as it moves about its way. It
starts from the movement a craft gets underway and the ends when
the journey is completed.
Position on the Earth’s Surface
2. Earth. The earth is not a perfect sphere. The shape of the earth is
an oblate spheroid. It is slightly flattened at the poles with equatorial
diameter about 24 miles more than the polar diameter.
3. Axis. An imaginary line passing through the center of the earth on

which earth rotates is called the Axis.
4. Poles. These are the extremities of the earth’s axis of rotation. The
North Pole is on the left and the South Pole is on the right of the
observer facing east.
5. East & West. The direction towards which the earth rotates is
called East and the opposite direction is the West. Therefore, the
earth rotates from West to East.
6. North & South. When an observer stands facing east, the True
North lies to his left and the South Pole to his right.
7. Great Circle. When a plane passes through the center of the earth
the resulting section is known as a Great Circle.
8. Small Circle. When a plane does not pass through the center of
the earth the resulting section is known as a small circle.
******************** Picture of page No. 192
9. Equator. It is a part of a Great Circle midway between poles. Every

point on the equator is therefore 90 deg from the poles. It is also
known as zero degrees latitude.
10. Meridians. These are the semi Great Circles, joining the poles and
are perpendicular to the equator.
11. Greenwich Meridian. The Meridian that passes through a place

called Greenwich is known as the Greenwich Meridian. It is also
known as Prime Meridian and Zero Meridian.
12. Latitude & Longitude. Earth’s surface is expressed by reference

to the plane of the equator and the plane of the Prime Meridian.
13. Latitude. The latitude of a place is the angle, which is

perpendicular to the earth surface at the place, makes with the
plane of the equator. It is measured 0 deg to 90 deg North or South
of the equator. In the figure, the latitude of the point M is the angle
MLE, where L is the point of intersection of the perpendicular to the
earth’s surface at M and the plane of the equator OE.
14. Longitude. The longitude of a place is the angle between the plane
of the Prime Meridian and the meridian of the place measured from
0 deg to 180 deg east or west of Greenwich.
15. The Sea Mile. The Sea Mile is the length of arc (1’) measured
along the Meridian in the latitude of the position. The length of the
Sea Mile is shortest at the equator (1842.9m) and the longest at the
poles (1861.6m) with a mean value of 1852.3 meters at 45 deg
N/S. One tenth of a Sea Mile is known as a Cable, which varies
between 184.3 meters & 186.2 meters according to latitude. A
cable is approximately 200 yards. This is a convenient measure
frequently used at sea for navigational purpose.
16. Geographical Mile. The Geographical Mile is the length of 1’ of arc
measured along the equator (ie 1’ of longitude). As the equator is a
circle, the length of the Geographical Mile is the same at all parts of
the equator and is equal to (a sin 1’ of arc). Its value is 1855.4
meters.
17. International Nautical Mile. This is standard fixed length of 1852

meters. Its correct abbreviation is nm. The distances given in
Admiralty Distance Tables and in ocean passage of the words are
in International Nautical Mile.
18. Statue Mile. The Statue or Land mile is the unit of distance of 1760
yards or 5280 feet (1609.3m).
19. Knot. It is convenient to have a fixed or standard unit for measuring

sped in navigation. This unit is International Nautical Mile (1852
meters) per hour and is called a know abbreviated to kn.
Directions on the Earth’s Surface.
20. True Direction. The true direction between two points on the earth
surface is given by the great circle between them. It is expressed in
terms of the angle between the Meridian and the Great Circle.
21. True North. True North is the northerly direction of the meridian
and is the reference from which true bearings and courses are
measured. The geographical north is the True North.
22. True Bearings. A true bearing of an object is the angle between

the meridian and direction of the object.
23. True Course. True Course is the direction along the earth’s surface
in which the ship is being steered (or intended to be steered). It is
measured by the angle between the meridian through the ship
position and the fore and aft line clockwise from 000 deg to 360
deg.
24. Gyro Compass. This instrument is a rapidly spinning wheel or

gyroscope, the axis of which is made to point along the meridian
towards true north. Courses and bearings, which are measured
using a gyrocompass, are true provided there is no error in the
compass, and are measured clockwise from 000 deg to 360 deg.
25. Gyro North. The direction north indicated by Gyrocompass is
known as Gyro North.
26. Magnetic Compass. This instrument may be considered as a bar

magnet freely suspended in the horizontal plane. It turns and
settles with one end pointing approximately to the north. It will not
point to the true north because the earth’s geographical or true
poles do not coincide with magnetic poles towards which the ends
of the compass needle are attracted.
27. Compass North. When we take the magnetic compass on board a

ship it is not only affected by earths magnetic force but also by the
ships inherent magnetism and the north shown by compass is
known as Compass North.

SECTION 2
CHART WORK
28. Charts issued to IN ships are produced by the National

Hydrographical Office, Dehradun. These are a total of seven folios
covering the entire Indian coast, the Northern Indian Ocean
including the Arabian Sea, the Bay of Bengal and select foreign
ports, Minor war vessels are issued with only the folio(s) covering
their areas of operations. Ships proceeding on Overseas
Deployment place their demand of additional charts on respective
chart depots.
29. Main Information Shown on Charts. Number of Chart, Title of the

Chart, Survey Date, Date of Publication and Edition, Date of
Printing, Chart dimensions, Scale of the Chart, Heights, Tidal
Stream Information.
30. Colors used on Charts. A variety of colors are used on charts.

Yellow color is used to distinguish land. Shallow water is
distinguished by a flat blue tint between the coastline and an
appropriate depth contour. A ribbon of blue tint is commonly
employed to emphasis the limit of water of slightly greater depth.
Magenta color is used for the emphasis of certain details notably
lights and radio aids. Green color indicates the extreme shallow
water including mud and all drying areas, which cover in High water
& uncover in low water.
31. Chart Folio. Ships ay be supplied either with individual charts or

with charts made up into folios. These folios are issued in
numbered geographical sets. The Indian Navigational charts are
arranged in seven folios.
32. Occasions for Demanding Charts. Following are the occasions

when charts are demanded:-
(a) On commissioning.
(b) Fair wear and tear.
(c) When ship is proceeding on a foreign cruise.
(d) Any new chart/new edition has been printed.
(e) Any special occasion.

33. Scales of Charts. Indian charts are published in three different
categories. These are:-
(a) Small Scale Charts. These charts are of two figured charts.
The information shown on the chart such as characteristics of
lights, sounding and other information are not in detail because
these charts cover a very large are (approximately about 500
nm). These charts are generally used for passage planning and
never to be used for navigation purpose.
(b) Medium Scale Charts. These charts are of three figured

charts. The information shown on the chart is sufficient for
coastal navigation and for passage. The sounding, the
information of lights and other danger are clearly shown on the
chart. These charts generally cover a small area of about 50 to
75 NM and are used for passage. These charts are also called
as Navigation Charts.
(c) Large Scale Charts. These are four figured charts. Large Scale
Charts generally are that of harbors and approaches to the
harbor. These charts contain all information that is required by a
vessel to enter/leave a harbor. All information that of lights,
buoys, beacons, conspicuous objects, radar conspicuous
objects and all dangers including the marking of wreck are
shown in great detail. The shoal patch, dry heights, tidal
information, pilot embarkation, areas wherein anchoring
prohibited, submarine cables and prominent land features near
to the harbor is also shown very clearly. These charts generally
cover a very small area of about 5 to 7 NM.
Symbols Used in Charts
34. Positions and Position Lines. The position line is any line, drawn
on the chart, on which the ship’s position is known to lie. It may be
straight or curved. If two or more position lines can be obtained at
the same moment, the position of the ship must be at their point of
intersection. The position thus obtained is known as a Fix.
Standard symbols used positions and position lines are given in
figure.
35. Arrowheads on Position Lines. There are three ways of plotting a
position line. They are:-
(a) A position line obtained from a bearing of a terrestrial object,

visually or by means of a navigational aid (eg DF bearing), is
distinguished by a single arrow at outer end.
(b) A position line obtained from an astronomical observation or

from the range of a terrestrial object is distinguished by a single
arrow at both ends.
(c) A position line that is transferred is distinguished by a double

arrow at the outer end for a terrestrial object and at both ends
for an astronomical observation.
Positions
36. The fix is shown on the chart as a dot surrounded by a circle, with
the time alongside, and the position lines, if appropriate, passing
the position of the fix. The fix is usually given a suffix (D), (O), (L),
(M), (S) Obs, HAS, etc to indicate it has been obtained by a method
other than by visual bearings or radar ranges.
37. Plotting a Position. A position may be expressed by its latitude

and longitude, or as range and bearing from a specific object. It
may be plotted on the chart using a parallel rule, divider, and the
scale of latitude and longitude appropriate to the chart itself.
38. Position by Observation. The navigator finds his position using

landmarks, heavenly bodies or radio aids and from his observations
obtains what are known as position lines. the position lines may be
obtained from variety of sources such as visual bearings, horizontal
sextant angles, radio navigation aids, radar, astronomical
observations and so on.
39. The Observed Position. It is very essential to distinguish between

the position obtained by observations of heavenly bodies. For this
reason, the position decided by the point of intersection of two
position lines derived from astronomical observations, or derived
from a number of such position lines derived from astronomical
observations, or derived from a number of such position lines, is
known as an Observed Position and in marked ‘Obs’.
40. Calculating the Position. When it is not possible to obtain the
ship’s actual position by fixing a position may be worked up based
upon the most recent fix. The following are means of obtaining the
position and factors to be considered whilst calculating the position
of the ship:-
(a) Dead Reckoning (DR). It is the expression used to describe

that position obtained from the true course steered by the ship
and her speed through the water and from no other factors. The
dead reckoning position is represented by the symbol +.
(b) Estimated Position (EP). This position is the most accurate

that the navigator can obtain by calculation and estimation only.
It is derived from DR position adjusted for the estimated effects
of leeway, tidal stream, current and surface drift. The EP must
always remain an approximate position, because these four
variable factors are difficult to determine exactly, although
experience helps long way to estimate the effect as accurately
as possible. It is indicated by triangles and four-figure time.
(c) Leeway. Leeway is the effect of wind in moving a vessel bodily

to leeward at right at right angles to course steered. The effect
of wind varies with every type of ship. The leeway depends
upon following factors:-
(i) Own Ship Speed. The higher the speed, less the
leeway.
(ii) Wind Speed. Higher the wind speed at right angles to

the course, greater the leeway.
(iii) Longitudinal Area. The greater the ratio of fore and aft
area above the water line to that below, the greater the
leeway.
(iv) The Depth of Water. The shallower the depth of water in

relation to the draught, the less the leeway.
(d) Tidal Streams. Tidal stream is the periodical horizontal

movement of the sea surface caused by the tide –raising forces
of the sun and moon. Tidal stream data must always be used
with caution, particularly at springs and around the calculated
time of change over from ebb to flood and vice versa. It will
often be found that the tidal stream experienced us different
from that calculated.
(e) Current. A current is the non-tidal horizontal movement of the
sea due mainly to meteorological, ocean graphical or
topographical causes. In some areas this movement may be
nearly constant in rate and direction. The main cause of most
surface currents in the open sea is the direct action of the wind
on the surface of the sea. A clear correlation exists between the
direction of the prevailing drift currents and the prevailing winds.
(f) Surface Drift. Surface drift can only be estimated from

experience and with knowledge of the meteorological conditions
in the area through which the ship is steaming. The maximum
surface drift approximately 1/40th of the wind speed.
41. Plotting the Track. Plotting the Estimated Position (EP) from a
known position is carried out in the following two steps:-
(a) Step One. Plot the course steered and the speed through the
water, thus arriving at the Dead Reckoning (DR) position.
(b) Step Two. Plot on from the Dead Reckoning position the effect
of:-
(i) Leeway.
(ii) Tidal stream.
(iii) Current.
(iv) Surface drift.
Thus arriving at the Estimated Position (EP).
42. Arrow on Tracks.
(a) A single arrow denotes course steered, water track, leeway

vector.
(b) A double arrow denotes ship’s ground track.
(c) A triple arrow denotes tidal stream, current surface drift and
drift.
43. Fixing. The visual fix is the foundation of all coastal navigation,
once a sound plan has been made. Fixes are vital, yet their
observations and plotting takes the eye of the Navigation Officer of
OOW away from other vital tasks of lookout.
(a) Plotting the Ships Position. The DR from the last fix must
always be maintained from some distance ahead of the ship
and an EP must be delivered from all available information of
tidal stream, current etc. As soon as the fix is obtained, the fix
position must be compared with the DR and EP to ensure that
there has been no mistake in identifying features ashore and
also to obtain an estimate of the strength and direction of any
stream or current since the last fix.
(b) Frequency of Fixing. Frequency of fixing should depend on

the distance from navigational hazards and the time the ship
would take to run into danger before the next fix depending
upon the ship’s speed.
(c) Speed. The speed ordered is normally shown in a box north

oriented alongside the track.
(d) Time Taken to Fix. The time taken to note the bearing and the
time, plot the fix on the chart, check the DR and lay off further
DR, verify time to “Wheel Over” and return to lookout, should
not be more than two minutes. It is very essential to reduce the
fixing time.
(e) Keeping the Record. A complete record, showing navigational

information in sufficient detail for the track of the ship at anytime
to be reconstructed accurately.
CHAPTER XVI
WIND, TIDES AND CURRENTS
Wind
1. General Effects. In most ships the pivoting point is well forward

when moving ahead, so that the pressure on the greater exposed
area abaft this point tends to turn the ship into the wind. When
going astern, the pivoting point moves aft and the stern tends to fly
into the wind. The degree to which these effects are felt depends
largely on the shape and disposition of the ship’s superstructure.
For example, a ship with a very high forecastle and much of her
top-hamper forward is not affected a great deal when going ahead,
but her stern seeks the eye of the wind rapidly as soon as she
gathers sternway. Wind effects are felt more strongly when speed
is slow and in a merchant ship when she is lightly laden. As ahead
speed is reduced the bow usually falls off the wind more and more
rapidly until, when the ship has lost all way, she lies approximately
beam on to the wind.
2. Effect When Turning at Rest. When turning at rest in calm

weather a ship pivots about appoint somewhere between her
centre of gravity and centre of area of her underwater profile. This
point is normally somewhat forward of amidships, but it moves
forward or aft with trim by the bow or stern respectively. Under the
influence of wind the attitude of a ship when stopped depends on
the relation between the area exposed to the wind before and abaft
the at-rest pivoting point. Usually a warship lies with the wind within
20 degrees of the beam and when settled there she requires a
greater turning moment than normal to start her turning at rest.
3. Drift. Any ship drifts to leeward under the influence of the wind, the
rate increasing progressively with the loss of headway or sternway
and with an increase in the angle of wind from the fore-and-aft line.
When stopped and beam on to the wind, the ship, as she drifts to
leeward, begins to transmit her motion to the water surrounding
her. The rate of drift increases up to a point at which both the ship
and a body of surrounding water are moving bodily to which both
the ship and a body of surrounding water are moving bodily to
leeward. Immediately the ship moves ahead or stern she will then
enter water that is not drifting and so will reduce her own rate of
drift to leeward.
4. Effect pf Sea. In the open sea strong winds is, of course,

accompanied by heavy seas or swell.
Current and Tidal Stream
5. Clearly the ship’s handing qualities are not affected in any way if
the whole body of water covering the area in which she is
manoeuvring is moving at a constant speed. In narrow waters,
allowance must be made for the distance the ship will be moved by
the stream during a manoeuvre. But it frequently occurs in confined
waters that the stream differs considerably within a small area, so
that the bows and stern may be exposed to quite different currents.
Shallow Water
6. The effects of shallow water on the speed of the ship and on the
flow of water past the hull when moving ahead may become
excessive if the depth of water is less than 1½ times the draught,
particularly if the ship enters such water at high speed. She may
become directionally unstable and fail to answer her rudder at all
and the draught aft may increase so greatly as to cause the
propellers to touch bottom. The effects are likely to be particularly
pronounced in ships where the propeller slipstream does not play
directly on to the rudder. The effects of shallow water on steering in
restricted waters such as canals or rivers are usually worse than in
open sea and are more likely to have dangerous results. The only
way to regain control is to reduce speed drastically at once.
7. When manoeuvring at slow speed or turning at rest in a confined

space in shallow water, the expected effects from the rudder and
the propellers may not appear. Water cannot flow easily from one
side of the ship to the other, so that the sideways force from the
propellers may in fact be opposite to what usually occurs. Eddies
may build up that counteract the propeller forces and the expected
action of the rudder. If the attempt to turn at rtest in shallow water
with ahead revolutions on one shaft and astern on the other fails or
the turn is very sluggish, the situation will almost certainly become
worse if the revolutions are increased. Stopping the engines to
allow the eddies to subside and then starting again with reduced
revolutions, is more likely to be successful.
CHAPTER XVII
SHIP AND BOAT MODELLING
SECTION 1
PRINCIPLES OF SHIP MODELLING
Introduction
1. Ship modeling is a creative activity to make models of boats, yachts

and various ships of the Indian and international navies. The
successful model maker has to be observant, coolheaded,
painstaking and careful.
Principles of Ship Modelling
2. It is not difficult for a beginner to make the desired models,

provided he has patience and some aptitude for this sort or work. It
is possible for any reasonably “handy” person to produce a good
model, provided he is prepared to give time and follows the
instructions carefully.
3. In the first stage, the cadets are taught to build elementary solid
models for which the parts are provided in the kit and they are only
to assemble them with the help of a sequential drawing supplied
with the kit.
4. In the second stage, the cadets are required to build powered

models and sailing yachts out of kits which contain pre-cut parts,
marine fittings and a construction plan. These steps are followed to
enable the ship modeler to finally construct advanced models from
full scale using only readily available material.
SECTION 2
READING AND DRAWING A STATIC MODEL
5. An important aspect in ship modeling is the ability to read a

drawing. Generally a drawing supplied with the it is known as a
constructional chart, assembly plan or blue print and comprises of
two aspects, these are:-
(a) The top view or ‘plan’. From the plan, length and breadth of the
superstructure fittings can be measured.
(b) The side view or ‘elevation’. From the elevation, length, height
and the actual thickness of the various parts or the
superstructure are measured.
6. In the case of a yacht, the drawing comprises of two figures i.e. the
hull plan and the sail plan. These plans may however differ from
yacht to yacht and from manufacturer to manufacturer. When
building a model, it is best to get the full size plans (if possible), as
this minimizes the chances of error, especially when enlarging from
a small scale plan since the error is multiplied by the scale.
7. Tools. It is impossible to list all the tools that may be required to

built a model. The number of tools required for modeling will vary
considerably with the individual as well as with the type of model
under construction. A list of the minimum required tools is given
below:-
(a) Measuring and Testing Tools. Tape, chain measure, foot-rule,

try square, sliding level, marking gauge and compass, etc.
(b) Planes. Jack plane, smoothing plane, compass plane,

adjustable compass plane and spoke shave, etc.
(c) Chisels. Gouging chisel, mortise chisel and flat chisel of various
sizes.
(d) Cutting Tools. Hand saw, fret saw, hacksaw, various types of
multi-craft knives.
(e) Boring Tools. Hand drill, gimlet etc.
(f) Vice and Clamps. Bench vice and clamps of various sizes.
(g) Files. Rasp rough, rough flat, round, triangular, Knife edge,
square, diamond etc.
(h) Miscellaneous. Hammers, nose pliers, cutting pliers, side

cutting pliers, scissors, screw drivers, set squares, soldering
iron, drill bits of various sizes etc.
Material
8. The material used for ship modeling is wood. With regard to actual
selection of wood, there are several suitable varieties of wood like
Douglas, fir, silver spruce, yellow pine, red cedar, hickory, maple.
African white wood, mahogany and teak.
9. Balsa is the most suited wood for modeling, especially if the model
is designed to take its characteristics into account. It is essential to
ensure that this wood is well scaled, since any absorption of water
creates considerable swelling, which can peel away the paintwork.
This wood is particularly useful in block form. When using the wood
for modeling it should always be remembered that it must not be
kiln dried, because it does not produce the same result as natural
seasoning.
Adhesives
10. One of the most important materials used in model building is an

adhesive and it need hardly be said that whatever the adhesive
used, it must be waterproof. For most purposes Nitro Cellulose
cement is suitable especially for work with Balsa wood. A wide
variety of adhesives are now available in the market and there are
several specialized products for boat building. The first essential
requirement is its insolubility in water, which rules out animal glue
products. Harder wood, other than balsa, needs slow drying resin
based adhesive. For very high adhesion with difficult materials,
such as metal to wood joints etc, epoxy resins such as Araldite are
extremely useful but, these are relatively expensive to use in large
quantities. Quick drying adhesives are useful for obtaining
reasonably quick results but do not hold well for longer durations.
SECTION 4
CARE AND HANDLING OF POWER TOOLS
11. The power tools such as jig saw machines, drilling, grinding, buffing
set, lathe set, wood turning set, saw and groover set, sanding and
polishing set etc. are expected to produce accurate work pieces not
only when the machines is new but throughout its working life. For
this reason the wear of the machine must not exceed certain limits.
It must be watched and parts which are faulty due to wear or other
damage must be replaced or repaired without delay. Therefore,
repair and maintenance work must be carried out in accordance
with Preventive Maintenance Schedules. Some of the important
principles of power tool maintenance are listed below:-
(a) Polythene/canvas dust covers are to be used to cover the

machine and equipment when not in use, to protect them
against dust and moisture.
(b) The user should be instructed to clean the machine after use,
with a hand brush. Slide ways are to be oiled to avoid
condensation of moisture and then to cover the machine with
dust cover.
(c) Each machine must have its tool cupboard for keeping all the
accessories required for use.
(d) Cadets should be taught the use of the various controls and the
correct manipulation of the machine before the commencement
of any skill training on the machine.
(e) A Check List / Store List showing all the items kept in the tool
cupboard is to be displayed in a prominent place inside the
cupboard.
SECTION 5
TYPES OF JOINTS USED IN CARPENTARY
12. The following joints are generally used in carpentry:-
(a) Lap joint (full lap and half lap).
(b) Halving joint (angle halving joint, dovetail halving joint and cross
halving joint).
(c) Mortice and tendon joints.
(d) Bridle joints.
(e) Tongue and groove joints.

SECTION 6
STABILIZING OF MODELS
13. One of the big advantages in ship modeling is that almost any thing
will float and given sufficient power can be induced to move through
the water. This provides satisfaction to the casual model maker, but
not to the conscientious modeler. Marine architecture is a very
exact science, however most essentials can be calculated fairly
simply.
14. A model’s first contact with water usually comes some time before
the last coat of paint is dry and the last detail is fitted. However, it is
far more practical to test the model during construction, since
alteration of subsequent position of components becomes a major
operation. The time for this is normally after initial two or three
coast of paint and, if possible, before permanent attachment of the
deck and superstructure.
15. Mark, the water line at stem and stern with pencil ticks, and place
components, or equivalent weights, in correct position and check
that the hull floats true. If after completion, ballast is required to
bring the model down to her marks or to correct trim. Determine the
required amount and its position by stacking cut chunks, flakes and
shots of lead in place, then melt the lead in to a convenient block
and place or screw to the hull bottom as low as possible.
16. But for other types of hulls like planked hull or hard chine hulls,
where the bulkheads are used for marking watertight compartment
and are glued with the keel, this process should be carried out in
the following manner; After stacking the flakes or shots in the
correct position between the bulkheads, melt the lead and make the
blocks according to the space available and then place/glue them
as near as possible to the keel.
SECTION 7
CALCULATION OF SAIL AREA FOR A MODEL
17. Although model yachts can be of different rigs, experience has

proved that the most practical and efficient is the Bermuda Rig.
This is the simplest rig possible as it consists of a triangular
(Bermudan or leg-o-mutton) main sail and single head sail (jib).
Hence all modern racing models without exception are rigged this
way. It will facilitate the subject, if we use the proper and correct
names/terms for the different part of the sail. If you refer to the plan,
it will be seen that there are two triangular sails. The front one is the
‘jib’, and after one the ‘Main’ sail. Each sail has three sides; the ‘luff’
(fore side) the ‘leach’ (after side) and the ‘foot’. The top corner is
the ‘head’, the front corner is the ‘tack’, and after corner the ‘clew’.
This applies to both jib and main sail. Actual sail area is measured
as follows:-
(a) Main Sail. The luff is measured from tack to the underside of
the head. The diagonal is a line taken from the clew to the luff
and perpendicular to it. The area of the sail is calculated by
multiplying the luff by the diagonal and dividing by two.
(b) Jib. The luff is measured from tack to underside or head to the
eye in the head. The diagonal is measured like in the main sail.
The area or the jib is then calculated by multiplying the luff by
the diagonal and dividing by two.
18. The measured area of the sail plan is the area of the main sail plus
area of jib. There is no limit on the height of the rig in this class but
the height or the jib stay above the deck must not exceed 80% of
the height of the main sail head above deck. Eg. Take a sail plan of
36” model yacht and measure it as under:-
Jib Main Sail
Luff 36.00” 50.00”
Leach 32.75” 52.50”
Foot 10.00” 20.00”
Foreside Mast 12 5/8” from bow
Sail Area
Jib = 36 x 10 / 2 = 180 sq inches
Main Sail = 50 x 20 / 2 = 500 sq inches
Total = 680 sq inches

***************** picture of page No. 209
SECTION 8
FITTING, PAINTING AND FINISHING OF MODELS
19. Fitting of Models. The number of fittings on any ship/boat model is

so staggering that it is impossible to deal with each type
individually. The best way is to study a ship of the same type as the
model or observe its details from photographs. The main fittings of
a ship are Davits, Search Lights, Mast, Anchors, Fairleads, Rigging
Block, Cleats, Bollards, Stag Horns, Steering Wheel, Port Holes,
Ventilators and Capstan etc.
Painting and Finishing a Model
20. A model is made or marred by the quality of its finish. It is not

enough merely to slap a coat of paint on the job. An extra hour or
two spent in a careful paint finish is worth the time and effort.
21. The secret of good painting is good preparation plus the use of
good tools and good quality materials. Thoroughness is essential,
especially in painting the interior of the model. Even a small
unpainted area, though cannot be seen from outside, can be
reached by water. Thereafter deterioration sets in and spreads
rapidly.
22. Thus, it is necessary to study the various phases of construction to

decide what parts must be painted before the next step renders it
inaccessible. The usual color for the inside of a boat is white,
though some builders prefer plain varnish or clear lacquer. In either
case the first coat should be well thinned and applied freely, thogh
not freely enough for it to run down and pool in the corners of the
structure. Following this coat, two full strength coats should be
applied, allowing plenty of time for them to harden. A meticulous
modeler will carefully rub down and finish at least those parts which
will be visible when the model’s hatches are removed.
23. It should always be determined before hand which kind of paint is

going to be used for painting the model. If Nitro Cellulose (NC)
based lacquer is to be applied then obtain a smooth surface by
using NC based primer surface only. If any gap is to be filled, it
should be done only after applying a thin coat of primer and that too
with NC based putty. When the putty is well dried, it should be
rubbed down with Carborundum paper. The rubbing is to be done
using Kerosene oil because there is every possibility of the wood
swelling, if water is used while rubbing. It must be remembered that
with each coat of primer, rubbing is required.
24. If the painting is to be done by brush, a thin coat of lacquer is
advisable every time to obtain good results.
25. Types of Models.
(a) Solid Model.
(b) Working Model.
(c) Sailing Model.
SECTION 9
POWERED SHIP MODEL
26. A model 40-50cm in length and minimum of 6 cm height is required

for Remote Control (RC) Operations. While operating the model,
check that there is no water leakage. The following items are
required to operate a RC Model:-
(a) Remote Control. Remote Control has the following important

items:-
(i) Transmiter. It operates the model to front, back and 360

degrees and this will run with 12V DC (8 battery cells of
1.5 V).
(ii) Receiver. It is fitted in model to receive the orders from

transmitter and works as ordered. Receiver runs with the
help of 6V DC (4 battery cells of 1.5V each).
(iii) Servers. T operates with the help of receiver as per

order passed by the transmitter and it will run as per the
orders of the receiver.
(b) Good model.
(c) Water Tank. Normally a water tank of 15 ft length, 10 ft width

and 2 ft height is required to operate a RC boat. It should be
filled with water upto 1 ft to operate the RC boat.
CHAPTER XVIII
FIRE FIGHTING AND DAMAGE CONTROL
SECTION 1
ATERTIGHT AND GASTIGHT INTEGRITY
Introduction
1. The structure of a modern warship comprises of steel plating &

sections interconnected in various ways to provide sufficient
strength to withstand the forces action upon her under every
condition of service. Ships are designed after considering the
following features:-
(a) Strength to withstand various forces under all conditions of

service.
(b) Buoyancy and stability.
(c) Space and protection for equipment and personnel.
(d) Habitability.
2. Special Design Features of Warships. The design of a warship

differs from a commercial vessel in the following broad aspects:-
(a) Extra strong structure.
(b) In-built redundancy of machinery/systems.
(c) Speed and maneuvering capabilities.
(d) Adequate reserve of buoyancy and stability.
(e) NBC Defence capabilities.
NBCD Aspects
3. There are many features of NBCD, which influence, or are

influenced by ship design and layout. Among the more important
are:-
(a) Watertight and Gastight subdivision, openings and fittings.
(b) Structural protection and scantling of hull.

(c) Dispersal, sitting and layout of equipment, systems and power
supplies, and arrangements for isolation, duplication and
resistance to shock.
(d) Ventilation, air-conditioning and air filtration system.
(e) Nuclear hardening of electrical system.
4. Watertight Subdivision. Watertight subdivision is achieved by the

following structures:-
(a) Main Transverse Bulkhead. These are watertight and carried

up as high in the ship as possible. They divide the ship
lengthwise into a number of main watertight sections. The
foremost bulkhead is called the ‘Collision Bulkhead’ and
extends from the keel to the weather deck.
(b) Main Longitudinal Bulkhead. In destroyers and small, fore

and aft bulkheads are kept to a minimum so as to avoid the risk
of flooding on only one side of the ship. A middle line
subdivision is, however, run in some bottom fuel tanks.
(c) Hull & Inner Bottom. The part of the hull below the waterline is
called the outer bottom. In some large ships an inner bottom is
constructed which extends normally over an area covered by
the machinery spaces and up the ship’s side abreast of them.
Where an inner bottom is fitted the space between it and the
outer bottom is called the double bottom, and this is divided into
suitably sized compartments by welded transverse and
longitudinal framing.
(d) Decks & Flats. These divide the ship in vertical direction. Flat is
a short, non-continuous length of deck. The weather decks are
‘cambered’ and sheered to allow water to drain easily. The
height of the lowest deck continuous through the ship is
governed by the height of the machinery spaces.
(e) Minor Bulkheads. These are fitted between decks in the

warship or more and aft direction as needed to subdivide the
main sections. They provide compartmentation for working
spaces; stores and provisions. They are not necessarily
watertight, although close watertight subdivision low in the ship
is very valuable in preserving watertight integrity.
5. Importance of Watertight Subdivision. Subdivision can be
watertight, gastight or non-watertight. Watertight subdivision is also
gastight though gastight structure is not necessarily watertight. The
features of the importance of the watertight subdivision are as
follows:-
(a) It contributes to the strength of the ship and increases

resistance to damage.
(b) It localizes flooding, preserves buoyancy and improves

stability.
(c) It restricts the entry and dispersion of NBC agents.
(d) It protects equipment and personnel.
(e) It caters for more stowage space for various liquids.
6. Red Zone. The area susceptible to immediate flooding on damage

is marked as Red Zone, which extends from the keel to somewhere
above the deep waterline, rising higher at the ends and, in a broad
ship, at the sides. Red Zone (the actual extent of which is unique
for each ship) thus provide a criterion of the need to exercise strict
control over openings in it before any damage and also enables all
that part of the ship to be quickly shut in an emergency.
7. Watertight Control Markings. The main W/T control markings are

X, Y or Z letter painted black on centre of door or hatch by a red
triangle across the upper corner furthest from the hinges for a valve
or scuttle by red disc (with or W/ O arrow) on or near the fitting. X,
Y markings are generally used only in the Red Zone. Z marking is
used outside the Red Zone to give W/T integrity and protection
against blast, flash and fire.
8. Gastight Control Markings. Ventilation inside a ship is controlled
by Gastight Control Markings viz A (Air), M (Machinery Spaces)
and R (Re-circulation).
9. Rules for W/T Markings.
(a) X (X-Ray) Markings. In Black on doors, hatches drain cocks etc

in Red Zone. Shut in all W/T conditions. To be opened only by
permission. It required to be kept open a sentry must be posted
or May be Left Open (MBLO) – disc must be used.
(b) Y (Yankee) Markings. In Black on doors, hatches valve which

affected W/T integrity in Red zone. Shut in conditions Yankee
and Zulu and open in condition X-Ray. When shut, may
normally be opened for passage or use but must be immediately
shut.
(c) Z (Zulu) Markings. In Black on similar opening to above

generally out side the Red zone, to give W/T integrity and
protect against blast, flash and fire. Shut in condition Zulu, open
in condition X-Ray and Yankee. When shut, the rules as in the
‘Y’ opening apply.
10. G/T Risk Markings. Any opening or fitting which is deemed to be,
when open, a risk to G/T integrity must be marked with an orange
letter A, M or R that means:-
(i) A. The alphabet A stand for ‘Air’, meaning that Air for
breathing passes through the opening so marked. It is shut
in condition ALFA. When condition ALFA is in force openings
so marked are not to be opened without permission from
DCHQ.
(ii) M. The alphabet M denotes ‘Machinery’ meaning that air

required for machinery spaces passes through the opening
so marked. It is opened in condition ALFA only. Opening so
marked are under the control of the user department. User
department must ensure that the orders regarding their ‘M’
openings are clear and fully understood by their personnel.
(iii) R. Fitting or equipment so marked must continue to run or

remain open for Re-circulation.
SECTION 2
FIRE FIGHTING
11. Fire Triangle. The term fire may be defined as a rapid, self-
sustaining oxidation process accompanied by the evolution of heat
and light of varying intensities. In other words “fire is a chemical
reaction between a fuel and oxygen in the presence of heat”. The
three components essential for a fire to take place are heat,
combustible material or fuel and supporter of combustion or
oxygen, represented as three arms of fire triangle.
COMPONENTS OF A FIRE
12. Oxygen. It is a good supporter of combustion and can undergo

chemical reactions with almost all kinds of fuel during combustion,
except inert gases. There must be at least 16% oxygen present for
a fire to burn. This is usually not a problem since the air we breathe
is about 21% oxygen.
13. Fuel. Fuel may be any combustible material in form of solid, liquid,
or gas. Typically solids and liquids must be heated to the point
where they are converted into a vapor or gas before they will burn.
On combustion the fuels may be considered undergoing thermal
decomposition; the resulting product may either undergo further
decomposition, or be burnt to the final product. Inspite of the wide
range in composition and properties, generally, all fuels may be
regarded as mixtures of four components viz Carbon, Gaseous
hydrocarbons, Hydrogen and Carbon Monoxide. Fuel can also be a
gas which starts to burn when its ignition temperature is reached.
Examples are paper, wood, cardboard, paint, oils, acetylene and
propane gas.
14. Heat. Heat, being a form of energy has the following effects:-
(a) Increases in size and pressure.
(b) Changes the physical state. Eg solid, liquid and gas.
(c) Produce glow or luminosity or color.
(d) Generate small electric current (thermo-electric effect).
15. Tetrahedron of Fire. Combustion is an exothermic, self-sustaining

reaction involving a solid, liquid and / or gas-phase fuel. The
combustion of fuel, air and heat does not cause a fire unless a
chemical reaction is initiated. Once you have three sides of the fire
triangle you promote a fourth element, a chemical reaction between
oxygen and fuel, consequently you have a fire tetrahedron.
16. Classes of Fire.
(a) Class A. Involving solid materials usually of an organic nature.

Eg Paper, grass cloth, coal, tree, wood furniture etc.
(b) Class B. Involving liquids or liquefiable solid. Eg Petrol, fuel oil,

lubrication oil spirit etc.
(c) Class C. Inflammable gases. Eg Acetylene gas, coal gas,

methane, chlorine gas, ammonia.
(d) Class D. Involving metals. Eg Copper, Zinc, Aluminium, Iron

etc.
(e) Class E. Live Electric (Old wiring electric motors, transformer or

any electrical operated equipment due to short circuit or
improper installation).
17. Principle of Extinction.
(a) By Cooling. The burning material is cooled below its ignition

temperature usually using water.
(b) By Smothering. By excluding Oxygen (Air) from the burning

material usually using CO2, steam or foam.
(c) By Starving. By removal of the fuel, accomplished by the

removal of the combustible material or the turning off the liquid
fuel supply.
(d) By Interruption in Flame Chemistry. By disrupting the

chemical reaction of the burning process by using Halon gas
BCF (1211) / BTM (1301).
18. Types of Fires.
(a) Solid Fuel Fire. Wood paper, cardboard Fabrics & many other
similar materials.
(b) Oil Fuel Fire. Lubricating oil, hydraulic oil, Kerosene, diesel
petrol etc.
(c) Electric Fire. Electricity does not burn. However when the
origin of a fire is electrical it is referred to as an Electrical.
Usually it is due to a fault in a live circuit which has generated
through heat to ignite a combustible material.
19. Types of Extinguishers.
(a) Halon. Halon compound comprises of Carbon, Fluorine,

Chlorine, Bromine and lodine. Eg BCF (HALON 1211) and
BTM (HALON 1301). Only 7.5% of Halon is required to
extinguish a fire for which 38% of CO2 is required to extinguish
a fire.
(b) 9 Ltrs AFFF Extinguisher. 8.450 Ltrs Water, 550 Ltrs AFFF
compound 120gm CO2 cartridge. Duration – 60 to 90 seconds.
Can be used on all types of fire except metallic fire.
(c) CO2 Extinguisher.
(i) Identification. Painted Black with silver top.
(ii) Extinguisher. By smothering.
(iii) Uses. (aa) On electrical fire especially for high voltage.
(ab) Can also be used on solid or liquid fuel fire.
(iv) Data. Various sizes of extinguishers are:-
(aa) 1.125 Kg of liquefied CO2.
(ab) 2.00 Kg of liquefied CO2.
(v) Discharge Duration. Depends on size.

(vi) Discharge Pressure. 850 Lbs/sq inch.
(vii) Test Pressure. 3360 Lbs/sq inch.
(d) Dry Chemical Power.
(a) Suitable for B&C class of fire.
(b) Color – Blue.
(c) Test Pressure – 700 Lbs/sq inch.
(d) Discharge pressure – 350 Lbs / sq. inch.
(e) Size of extinguisher 1.8 kg. P12 and P15 Extinguisher.
(f) CO2 cartridge of 60 grams and 240 grams.
(g) Principle. Smothering.
(h) Discharge Duration. 5 to 10 sec and 45 sec.

(i) Uses. Provided to use on Flight deck and Helicopter
Handling Platforms and can be used on Solid Liquid &
Fuel Fire.

CHAPTER XVIII
SURVIVAL AND RESCUE
SECTION 1
MODERN METHODS OF RESCUE AND RESUSCITATION
Introduction
1. However remote the possibility of disaster from fire, collision,

stranding or enemy action may be, seamen should always be
prepared to abandon ship when necessary and take to the fire rafts.
Preparation for such eventualities includes the provisions of
lifesaving and training in its use, but the best equipment is of little
value without good organization and high standards of discipline,
leadership and morale.
2. A man’s chance of survival after shipwreck is better today than at

any time in the past. A lifejacket is designed to enable the wearer to
jump safely in to the sea from a considerable height and to keep
the wearers mouth and nose out of the water should he be
unconscious or asleep a survival suit keeps him warm and an
enclosed life raft protect him from the elements and provides him
with food and water until rescued.
3. The prospects of rescue have also been improved by radio

beacons on which a searching aircraft can home from 100 miles
and by other aids to detection.
MODERN METHODS OF RESCUE
4. If the survivors are active and the conditions are favorable, they
should board the ship by scramble net or ladder. If the survivors are
distressed, or conditions are unfavorable, recovery should be made
by lifting the survivor using line secured to becket of the lifejacket or
by using a strop.
5. The following methods of rescuing large number of survivors

floating in the water have been used successfully by ships:-
(a) A cargo net can be slung over the side below a pair of davits.
(b) A hammock, canvas strop or bosun’s chair for injured survivors.

(c) Boat booms of frigates are rigged to haul out a scramble net.
(d) A coir hawser can be bent to a buoy and fitted with cork flats
and streamed astern to allow the survivors to grasp it.
(e) A line throwing projector can be used to pass a line to an

isolated survivor.
6. Rescue in Harbor. A life jacket and a long length of long lifeline

must always be kept ready in harbor for immediate use. The
rescuer, who should be a strong swimmer wears the lifejacket with
lifeline secured to it and swims to the casualty for rescue. Should
the length of lifeline fall short, then they should be recovered by
boat.
7. Rescue by Helicopter. The following methods of rescuing large

number of survivors using a helicopter are used:-
(a) Helo Strop Method.
(b) Helo Rescue Net.
(c) Helo Double Rescue Harness.
MODERN METHODS OF RESUSCITATION
8. It is in the interest of all seamen to know how to apply artificial

respiration to an apparently drowned person. Two methods are
taught in the Navy viz, the ‘Expired Air’ (mouth-to-mouth) Method
and the ‘Holger Nielson Method’.
The Expired Air (Mouth-to-Mouth) Method
9. This method gives a more reliable inflation of the lungs than the
Holger Nielsen method described later and is of particular
importance in the Navy because it can be administered in a
confined space or even whilst still in the water.
10. Procedure. Where possible, the patient should be placed on his

back and the mouth quickly cleared of any obvious debris, such as
water, oil, fuel or seaweed. Place a flooded coat or other support
under the shoulders Tilt back the head as far as possible (into the
‘sword swallowing’ position), when the mouth will usually open. It is
most important to hold the head right back to ensure a clear airway.
The operator takes a deep breath and places his mouth, wide-
open, over that of the patient. The patient’s nostrils may be closed
with the cheek or pinched between the thumb and forefinger of the
convenient hand. The operator now breathes strongly into the
patient’s lungs, thereby raising the chest. He then takes his mouth
away and turns his head to one side to observe the chest fall. At
the same time he may hear the air escaping from the lungs. This
falling of the chest is a sign that the inflation has been effective.
When the chest has ceased to fall the inflation is repeated and the
cycle continued until natural breathing is restored or hope is
abandoned. If the chest fails to move, check clearness of the mouth
and the position of the head. In few cases it may be necessary, by
pressing behind the angles of the jaw to push the jaw forward.
When breathing into a child’s lungs much less force is needed than
when inflating an adult’s. With babies, gentle puffs only should be
used.
******** Picture of page No. 224

The Holger Nielson Method
11. On recovering the body of an apparently drowned person, you must

start artificial respiration immediately.
12. Procedure. Place the patient face down with both the palm
downwards and the forehead resting on top of them. The mouth
and nose must be clear of the ground. Kneel on one knee and put
your hands on the patient’s back so that the thumbs just touch, with
the outside edges of the wrists near the points on the shoulder
blades. Rock slowly forward, elbows straight, until your arms are
vertical, exerting steady pressure on the chest. At the end of this
movement, release the pressure and slide the hands back over the
shoulders and upper arms, grasping them just above the elbows.
Quietly raise and pull on the arms grasping them just above the
elbows. Quietly raise and pull on the arms until resistance is felt at
the patient’s shoulders. The patient’s trunk must not be raised, nor
should the position of his hands and head be disturbed. This cycle
should be repeated 12 times in a minute with a steady rhythm and
even pace and you should listen intently for the clear movement of
air through the respiratory passages.

SECTION 2
LIFESAVING APPLIANCES
Lifejackets
13. There are worn by individuals to support themselves in the water.

The inflatable stole is packed in a pouch worn in the small of the
back so that it does not hinder the wearer. When danger threatens,
the pouch is pulled to the front and unbuttoned, and the stole of the
jacket is slipped over the head. It is inflated by removing the
inflation tube from the retaining loop, unscrewing the rubber or
plastic mouthpiece and blowing into the tube while the mouth is
pressed against a light spring so as to unseat the valve and allow
the air to pass. A few puffs are sufficient to provide buoyancy in the
water and the jacket will still permit a reasonable amount of the
head and arms. When fully inflated, the jackets will cause the
wearer to float on his back at an angle of about 45 degrees. So any
swimming must be done on the back. In this attitude the head is
supported clear of the water, so that an unconscious or sleeping
man is still able to breathe.
14. The life jacket is fitted with a hoisting harness and a line and toggle
so that the survivor may secure himself to other survivors or to any
suitable floating object. There is a whistle and a lamp: the latter’s
battery must not be wasted. The security of the lifejacket and the
operation of the mouth valve should be tasted daily, inspection of
the rubber parts, battery, lamp and whistle is also required.
15. Every ship must carry an approved type of lifejacket for every
person on board, and these lifejackets must be stowed in a
conspicuous position on deck and plainly indicated. Each lifejacket
must be marked to show that it has been approved by the national
authority.
Lifebuoys
16. If a man falls overboard a lifebuoy is thrown for him to cling to until
he can be rescued. Most lifebuoys are fitted with self igniting lights
and some have lifelines attached. Normally, two lifebuoys are
carried aft, one on each side of the ship under the charge of the
Lifebuoy Sentry at sea; two are placed on the bridge, one on each
bridge wing and a third pair is carried amidships.
17. A lifebuoy is of circular shape and is nowadays usually made of
Polyurethane Foam encased in a plastic cover. Older types may be
made of cork or balsa wood covered with painted canvas. A
lifebuoy must:-
(a) Be capable of supporting 14.5 kilograms of iron in fresh water

for 24 hours.
(b) Not be adversely affected by oil or oil products.
(c) Be of a highly visible color.
(d) Be marked in block letter with the name and port of registry of
the ship in which it is carried.
(e) Be fitted with beckets securely seized.
18. Man Overboard Markers. This device gives off a dense, orange-
colored, non-toxic smoke for a minimum period of 15 minutes. It is
ignited by a sea cell at the bottom. It also has two lights supported
by the sea cell that burn for a minimum of 90 minutes. The marker
and the lifebuoy are mounted together and are connected by a 6 ft
long Terylene line, so that they remain attached when the lifebuoy
is released or thrown overboard.
Rigid Liferafts
19. These are similar to inflatable life rafts, except that they do not
depend on inflation for their buoyancy. Rigid life rafts are permitted
by the SOLAS Convention but nowadays they are usually only used
for particular applications, notably on board tankers. This type of
raft is not so constructed that when dropped into the water from its
normal stowage the life raft nor will its equipment suffer damage.
The raft must be effective and stable and its equipment must be
readily available, when floating either way up.
Inflatable Liferafts
20. These are collapsible fabric rafts which can be inflated

automatically or manually by means of gas contained in cylinders
fitted to the raft. They are supplied on a scale of raft seats for the
full war complement plus 10 percent rafts spare. There are two
sizes, th 8 – Man Liferaft for very small ships and craft and the 20 –
Men Liferaft. They are packed tightly in weather – proofed canvas
valises and in some ships in Glass Reinforced Plastics Containers.
21. Associated with a life raft is a survival pack containing food, water,
first-aid kit, repair outfit etc. The pack for the 8 –man life-raft is
stowed inside the raft, while the pack for the 20 –man life raft is
separate and stowed above the life raft valise. Both the pack and
valise are held in place by canvas webbing and protected by a
cover which are either slipped by hand or released hydrostatically if
the ship founders before this can be done. When the pack and
valise have been launched overboard the valise remains secured to
a strong-point near the stowage by an operating cord. One or more
sharp pulls on this cord operates a gas release mechanism, and
the raft then inflates and bursts out of the valise.
22. The requirements of an inflatable life raft are the same as for a rigid
life raft but the inflatable life raft must satisfy the following additional
requirements:-
(a) The life raft and its equipment must not become damaged when
dropped into the water from a height of 18 meters or the height
of its stowage if this is greater.
(b) The raft must be capable of being readily righted by one person
if it inflates in the inverted position.
(c) The raft is to be contained in a valise or container in which it is

inherently buoyant.
(d) The total weight of the raft, its valise or container and its
equipment is not to exceed 180 kilograms.
(e) The floor of the raft is to be waterproof and capable of being

insulated against cold,
(f) The subdivision of the buoyancy compartments and means of

inflation are to be such that if only half the compartments are
inflated the raft will still support its approved complement of
survivors.
(g) The gas used for inflation of the raft must not be injurious to the
occupants. Inflation is to occur automatically by the pulling of a
line or some other simple device.
(h) Means must be provided of topping up the raft buoyancy
compartments. The raft must be constructed so as to withstand
exposure for 30 days afloat in all.
(i) The raft must be capable of operating throughout a temperature

range of -30 degrees centigrade to 66 degrees centigrade.
(j) The raft must be stowed so that it is readily available in an

emergency, and will float free, inflate and break free from the
ship if she sinks.
(k) If lashings are used to secure the raft in its stowage they must
be fitted with an automatic release mechanism.
23. Equipment Fitted in the Liferaft. The equipment and its scale of
supply for rigid and inflatable life rafts is laid down in the SOLAS
Convention and comprises: rescue quoits and buoyant line, knives
and balers, sponges, sea anchors paddies, puncture repair outfit,
topping-up pump for inflatable rafts, tin openers, first-aid outfit,
water rations and graduated drinking vessel waterproof torch
capable of signaling Morse code, spare batteries and bulb, daylight
signaling mirror and whistle, parachute distress-signals and hand
flares set of fishing tackle, food rations, anti-seasickness tablets,
survival instructions and an illustrated copy of the table of lifesaving
signals.
Lifeboats
24. Lifeboats may be propelled by oars, sail and mechanical power or

by a compression-ignition engine. Every lifeboat must have ample
stability in a seaway and adequate freeboard when loaded with its
full complement of persons and equipment.
LIFESAVING EQUIPMENT
Radio apparatus and Searchlights
25. The SOLAS Convention specifies the number of motor liferafts

which are to be fitted with radio apparatus and a searchlight. The
radio apparatus must be fitted in a cabin late enough to
accommodate the equipment and the operator. The searchlight
must have a power of at least 80 watts and be capable of
illuminating a light colored object at a distance of up to 180 meters.
Portable Radio Apparatus
26. An approved portable radio apparatus for survival craft is carried on

board every ship which does not carry on each side a motor lifeboat
fitted with radio. The radio must be capable of transmitting and
receiving on the international distress frequencies, watertight,
capable of being dropped into the sea without damage and of
floating in seawater, and capable of being operated in emergency
by an unskilled person.
Line-throwing Appliances
27. Every ship must carry a line throwing appliance capable of throwing
a line 230 meters with reasonable accuracy and appliance must
include at least four lines and four projectiles.
SECTION 3
DISTRESS SIGNALS
28. All merchant ships which proceed to sea carry at least 12

parachute distress rockets which show a bright red light at high
attitude. The red flare is designed to light at a minimum height of
300 meters and to extinguish when it has descended to a height of
not less than 50 meters above sea level.
29. Warships place a Lifebuoy sentry during dark hours on the aft
portion of the ship. There is always in electric rattler for
communication with the bridge as follows:-
(a) One Ring – Cast overboard the Starboard Lifebuoy.
(b) Two Rings – Cast overboard the Port Lifebuoy.
(c) One Ring – Cast overboard both Lifebuoys.

CHAPTER XIX
ANTI SUBMARINE WARFARE
Introduction
1. Ever since the World War I, the submarine threat has been
assuming greater proportions and therefore one of the primary
functions of naval ships is to safeguard themselves and the ships
they are escorting from this threat.
2. To combat this threat warships first detect the submarine and then
destroy it. Detection is achieved with the aid cf equipment called
SONAR fitted onboard ships and helicopters. SONAR is an
abbreviation of Sound Operating Navigation and Ranging.
SECTION 1
SONAR
3. Sonar, acronym for SOund Navigation And Ranging, a detection

system based on the reflection of underwater sound waves, just as
radar is based on the reflection of radio waves in the air. A typical
sonar system emits ultrasonic pulses by using a submerged
radiating device; it listens with a sensitive microphone, or
hydrophone, for reflected pulses from potential obstacles or
submarines.
4. Modern submarines rely on SONAR for detecting the presence of

enemy vessels. The most advanced system, called a Towed Array,
uses a long cable to which hydrophones are attached. At sea, the
submarine deploys this cable so that it trails far behind. Airplanes
are used to deploy a different type of sonar. This sytem uses a
device called a sonobuoy, consisting of a hydrophone mounted in a
floating buoy. It is designed so that when a sound, such as that of a
submarine engine, is picked up, the detector operates a small radio
transmitter that sends out a signal that can be received by patrolling
antisubmarine planes.
Principle of SONAR
5. The basic principle of SONAR is the same as an echo sounder,

wherein a sound wave is transmitted by the SONAR through water
and on striking a solid object such as a submarine this sound wave
is reflected back as an echo. By analyzing the nature of the echo
the presence of a submarine may be established.
6. To determine the position of the submarine, the range and bearing

of the contact is necessary. The interval between the transmission
and the reception of the echo is measured to determine the
distance. The direction of the echo gives the bearing of the target.
Components of a SONAR Set
7. The important components of a SONAR Set are:-
(a) Dome. This is fitted at the keel of the ship and can be raised
and lowered or permanently fitted below the keel. The Dome
houses the transducer by which sound waves are transmitted
and received.
(b) Instrument Spaces. Generators, amplifiers, transformers etc.

required for operation of the SONAR systems are fitted in the
Instrument Space.
(c) SONAR Control Room (SCR). This compartment contains the

Automatic Control Training Unit, Range Recorder, Bearing
Recorder and Depth Recorder.
SECTION 2
ASW WEAPONS
Torpedo
8. Introduction. A torpedo is a self-propelled underwater weapon that

carries a high-explosive charge to its target. A torpedo can do more
damage than a projectile from the biggest guns on a battleship.
There is more explosive in a torpedo war head than there is in any
projectile. The torpedo war head explodes under water, and that
increases its destructive effect. When a projectile explodes, a part
of its force is absorbed by the surrounding air. But when the
torpedo war head explodes, the water transfers almost the full force
of the explosion to the hull of the target ship. Thus, even if a
projectile could carry the same amount of explosive, the torpedo
would do more damage. A torpedo moves slowly compared to a
projectile and its effective range is much shorter. The torpedo is an
important weapon of destroyers, destroyer escorts, and frigates.
Homing torpedoes are a relatively recent development, they have
been perfected since the end of World War II. With homing
torpedoes, a destroyer can attack a submerged submarine, even
when its exact position and depth are unknown. The homing
torpedo is becoming increasingly important as a weapon with which
one submerged submarine may attack another.
9. Description. The torpedo is a cigar shaped weapon. 18 or 21

inches in diameter and 15 to 18 feet in length. Basically it consists
of two parts:-
(a) Head. This may be a warhead or a practice head depending

upon whether it is being fired in war or for practice.

(b) Torpedo Body. This is the container which houses the

propulsion machinery and the control mechanism and delivers
the warhead to its destination. Its main components are:-
(i) Engine. This is a special designed engine which enables

the torpedo to run under the water.
(ii) Depth Keeping Mechanism. This mechanism enables

the torpedo to run at a constant predetermined depth.
(iii) Tail Section. This consists of two contra-rotating

propellers, horizontal and vertical rudders and fins.
10. Torpedo Launch. There are two principal ways to launch a torpedo
– by firing it from a tube, or by dropping it from a rack. Aircraft drop
torpedoes from launching racks; usually, an aircraft carries only a
single torpedo. Newer destroyers and frigates are fitted with tubes
located below the weather deck with their muzzles extending
through the sides of the deck house. Torpedoes are expelled from
these tubes by compressed air. Submarines fire torpedoes from
fixed, below-water tubes. On firing, the torpedoes are expelled from
the tubes by compressed air. Spare torpedoes are carried in ready
racks near the tubes.
Depth Charge
11. Depth Charge, explosive charge, or bomb, designed to go off under

water at a given depth by means of a hydrostatic detonator and
used as a weapon against submarines. A direct hit is not always
necessary with a depth charge because the concussion of its
explosion is effective at some distance under water. Depth Charges
were first used during World War I. The early forms of the weapon
consisted of large cylinders containing TNT, which were rolled or
catapulted, usually two at a time, from the stern of a ship. During
World War II depth charges and machinery for launching them were
improved. The use of a new and more powerful explosive called
Torpex, a mixture of RDX, TNT, and aluminum, materially reduced
the size of depth charges. The casings were also streamlined to
make the charges sink faster.
12. The more recent depth charges carry magnetic or acoustic devices
that detonate the explosives in the vicinity of enemy craft.
Squid and ASW Mortar
13. The squid and ASW mortar are basically projectiles throwing
mechanisms which are fired from ships on the future position of the
submarine. The Squid can only be fired ahead at a fixed range and
depth. The A/S Mortar is an improvement on the Squid, since it can
be fired all round and the latest depth of the submarine can be set
on it, increasing its kill probability.
Anti Submarine Rocket (ASROC)
14. Unlike the squids and ASW mortars the ASROCs are self propelled
weapons which can be fired at the future position of the submarine,
and have longer ranges. They are normally fired in sets of 16 to 64
rockets and their pattern is normally set at varying depths to cater
for the depth of the submarine. The ASW Rocket Launchers in the
Indian Navy are:-
(a) RBU-6000
(b) RBU-6000 (RPK-8)
(c) RBU-12000 (UDAV-1)
(d) RBU-1000
(e) GSh-30
Mines
15. Naval mines are much larger than land mines, with sizes ranging
from 200 kg (500 lb) to over 900 kg (2000 lb). Naval mines can be
triggered either by direct contact or by indirect influence, such as
the sound from the ship’s engines. When a mine is triggered, the
expanding gas ball from the explosion sends a shock wave through
the water. When the wave hits a ship’s hull, the force of the shock
wave can punch a hole through it, damage systems in the ship, or
even break the ship’s back by buckling its keel. Mines are generally
of two types:-
(a) Moored Mines. These mines are anchored to the seabed. They
are of the following types:-
(i) Contact Mines. Contact mines were the earliest

successful types of naval mines. They exploded when a
target physically collided with the mine or its antenna.
Small nodes or horns on the mine would break when hit
by a passing ship, and the broken node would complete
an electrical circuit (a loop through which electricity can
flow). The flow of electricity would then detonate the
mine. Many moored mines used an antenna above the
mine that would connect with a ship’s metal hull to
complete an electrical circuit.
(ii) Influence Mines. Influence mines sense changes in the

magnetic field, pressure, or sound wave patterns in
surrounding water that signify a ship passing near the
mine. Magnetic mines respond to changes in the local
magnetic field induced by the metal framework of a ship.
Ships can avoid triggering some influence mines by
being demagnetized or by carrying electrical devices to
reduce their magnetic field. Acoustic mines respond to
sounds from propellers, propeller shafts, or vibrations in
the hull of a ship. Pressure mines respond to the effect a
ship has on the pressure of the water it is the passing
through. Such mines often count pressure events and go
off after a few ships have passed through safely. Most
modern naval mines use all three sensors to triple-check
a target.
(b) Ground Mines. Some influence mines simply rest on shallow

ocean floors, while other mines are moored, or anchored to the
bottom of the ocean. Some submarines carry mines that can
travel for several miles after being released and automatically
plant themselves in predetermined spots. Naval mines that are
moored are held at a preset depth by a cable tethered to an
anchor.
Minelaying and Minesweeping
16. The most common method used for planting naval mines is to drop
them from aircraft. Aircraft can be sent to an area more quickly than
surface ships, and they can spread mines faster and over a greater
area. When secrecy is important, navies use submarines to lay
mines because they can do so without being discovered easily.
Most naval mines become active at a preset time after they have
been laid and neutralize themselves after a fixed time.
17. Minesweepers are used to detect and clear, or sweep, underwater

mines so that ships can pass safely. Large winches at the rear of
the minesweeper lower sonar buoys into the ocean to detect mines.
18. Minesweeping at sea, as on land, is time-consuming and not

always effective. Minesweeper ships use large devices with shapr
teeth, to cut the cables of moored mines. Ships or sleds towed by
helicopter may also use noisemakers or pressure inducers to
trigger influence mines. Remotely operated boats or underwater
vehicles can also be employed to sweep an area and to reduce the
risk to a crew.
Submarine-Based Missiles
19. India has a number of foreign-produced cruise missile systems in

its arsenal, which includes the Klub (SS-N-27). It also has some
indigenous cruise missile systems under development, including
the Sagarika and Lakshya variants. The Navy has got the Lakshya
PTA. The Sagarika (Oceanic) began development in 1994 as a
submarine-launched cruise missile (SLCM) which will have a range
of at least 300 km (a few claim 1000 km). Another successful
program has been the development of the Yakhont Anti Ship
Missile system into the BrahMos, by NPO and India’s DRDO. The
BrahMos has been tailored to Indian needs and uses a large
proportion of Indian esigned components and technology, for its fire
control systems, Transporter erector launches, to its onboard nav-
attack system.
CHAPTER XXI
GUNNERY
Introduction
1. The ultimate aim of a Gunnery weapon systems or the combined

effect of several Gunnery systems, viz guns, guided weapons and
electronic warfare etc. is the destruction or distraction of targets in
the shortest possible time with the minimum expenditure of
ammunition. The system should, therefore, be able to engage
maximum possible menacing targets as they reach MER and till the
time they cease to be dangerous.
2. Direction of appropriate weapons system on the correct targets at

the right time, thereby ensuring optimum use and exploitation of the
weapon system to the best advantage is a considerable art. This is
particularly more so at the time of stress when the targets
outnumber the weapon system and simultaneous engagement of
all targets is not feasible. The weapon director should, therefore, be
alert to the prevailing situation and possible developments. They
should also have the ability to decide when particular targets cease
to be hostile and when continuation of an engagement would be
ineffective and cause wasteful expenditure of ammunition. In brief
the weapon director should be able to clearly decide which target to
engage by which weapon and for how long.
3. Thus the gunnery capabilities of a warship set the Navy apart from
the merchant Navy. To achieve this aim, sophisticated weapon
equipment is used by the modern navies. However, it is always the
man behind the machine who is more important than the machine.
4. The Commanding Officer is responsible to keep the ship always

ready for war. Accordingly he should keep the ship in appropriate
degree of readiness as ordered by higher authorities or as indicated
by prevailing circumstances. The ships should always be ready
both in harbor and at sea to counter impending threat or be
prepared of intended action. A foreign man of war should never be
approached without being prepared to defend your ship. However,
while taking precautions do not exhibit outward marks of
preparation. The Commanding Officer should also ensure that all
armament onboard is operational and ready for immediate action.
ARMAMENT FITTED ONBOARD SHIPS
Submarine Launched Ballistic Missile
1. Sagarika.
2. Agni-III SLBM (Under development)
Ballistic Missile
3. Prithvi-III Ballistic Missile (Dhanush)
Cruise/Anti-Ship Missile
4. Brahmos Supersonic Cruise Missile
5. Klub Anti-Ship/Land Attack Cruise Missile
6. Kashmir
7. P-15, P-20, P-21, P-22
8. Sea Eagle
9. Nirbhay long range subsonic cruise missile (under

development)
10. Uran
Air to Air Missiles
11. Magic Matra
Surface to Air Missiles
12. Barak-8 (Under development)
13. Barak
14. RZ 61
15. RZ 13
16. OSA-M.
17. Igla.
Main Guns
18. A-190(E) 100mm
19. AK-100 100mm
20. AK-76 76mm gun
21. AK-76/60 76mm gun
22. AK 726 Twin mount gun (76mm)
23. OTO Melera Rapid 76mm gun
24. 4.5” Mk6 Vickers 114mm gun
25. 40/60 Bofors 40mm/57mm/60mm guns
26. Oerlikon 20mm gun (for Patrol Boats)
Air Defence Guns
27. AK-630
28. AK-230
29. CADS-N-1 Kashtan

CHAPTER XXII
FAMOUS NAVAL OPERATIONS
GOA OPERATION 1961
1. Provocative action against our nationals in the vicinity of Anjadip

Island and Portugal’s belligerent attitude to the problems of its
colonial possessions in this country, resulted in the Government of
India’s decision to liberate Goa. Operations were launched on the
night of 17/18 December 1961.
2. The Naval task was to gain control of the seaward approaches to

the Bays of Marmagao and Aguada, prevent interference by
Portuguese naval units, occupy anjadip Island and provide fire
support to the troops.
3. At first light on 18 December 61 the Navy went into action under the
command of Rear Admiral BS Soman, then Flag Officer
Commanding, Indian Fleet. The ships conducted their mission in
three geographical areas.
4. INS Delhi was assigned to play the stellar role of Diu. On spotting
two Portugues vessels, she opened up with her guns and sank one
of them, whiel the other was scuttled by her crew. Delhi also
supported the Indian Army’s advance into Diu, neutralizing the
citadel and the airfield’s control tower with her bombardment.
5. Meanwhile naval ships had been patrolling off Marmagao and on

the morning of 18 December they saw the Portuguese frigate
Afonso de Albuquerque in harbor. Her guns were firing at the Indian
Air Force. Indian naval ships Betwa, Beas and Cauvery closed in
and engaged the frigate from a range of 8,000 yards. She was
badly hit and huge fires broke out. Her crew swiftly abandoned her.
6. As assault party from INS Venduruthy landed ashore to capture

Anjadip, helped by heavy firing from INS Trishul. It managed to gain
control over the southern part of the island, overcoming stiff
resistance. A second party landed from INS Mysore to firm up
communications.
7. The capture of the northern part of the island proved more difficult;
it was only after the 4.5” guns from Trishul intensively raked the
fortified positon that the garrison eventually surrendered. For that
spirited action, the Navy won twelve decorations – three of them
posthumously.
1971 OPS
03 – 16 DECEMBER 1971
8. Hostilities broke out between India and Pakistan on 03 Dec 71. The
twilight hours of 03 December turned out to be the dawning a new
era for the Indian Navy. On the very night that hostilities
commenced, with Pakistan bombing several air fields (03 Dec
1971), IN Ships Rajput and Akshay were leaving Vishakapatnam
harbor when they obtained a sonar contact. They field several
depth charges, and proceeded on their mission when there was no
further evidence of a submarine’s presence. Thereafter a loud
explosion was heard rattling windows panes off the Visakapatnam
beach. The Pakistani submarine Ghazi (a Tench class submarine
obtained from the USA in 1964) had come to grief.
9. The Indian Navy’s aircraft carrier and her aircraft played a decisive
role in the Eastern theatre of the war. The Seahawk and Alize
squadrons wrecked havoc on vital installations in East Pakistan.
Very shortly, the Indian Navy’s Eastern Fleet was in complete
control of the sea and the surrounding air space. Pakistani troops,
desperate to escape, sought to use merchant ships for military
purposes. Four Pakistani tugs, the merchant ship Baquir, and a
Liberian ship were intercepted and escorted to Indian ports. Many
others were either scuttled or captured. Moonless nights were
selected for the missile boat attack on Marachi harbor. The attack
was one of the historic moments of the Indian Navy’s victory and
remains etched in naval memory. The only Indian ship lost during
the 1971 operations was the frigate INS Khukri.
10. Lieutenant General Niazi signed the Instrument of Surrender on 16

December 1971.
OPS PAWAN
11. Several of the more recently developed capabilities of the Navy

have proved their utility in the challenging venture that Operation
Pawan has become. The scale and quality of the naval role in the
peace-keeping mission in Sri Lanka warrants special mention.
12. In fact long before the unrest in the northern part of the island
nation assumed its present complexion, the Navy was at work. As
ethnic strife raged through the Jafana region, the Navy was called
upon to monitor the movement of vessels carrying refuges and to
protect fishing boats.
12. The signing of the Indo-Sri Lanka Agreement on 29 Jul 87 and the
stance taken thereafter by the LTTE added several dimensions to
the scenario. It was a multi-purpose role that the Navy was required
to play.
13. Transportation and maintenance of the Indian Peace Keeping

Force necessitated a virtual ‘milk run’ to the island from ports in
South India. An estimate of what was involved tells some of the
story – 200,000 men ferried, in either direction; 100,000 tones of
stores, 8,000 vehicles. Ships from the merchant fleet also lent their
support. It also proved how closely linked the naval and mercantile
fleets are, in the overall maritime interest of the nation.
14. A ‘cordon militaire’ was established by the Eastern Naval

Command in October 87, supported by the Coast Guard. A 300-
mile-long line of control was constantly patrolled by ships and
aircraft. At any given time more than a dozen vessels were
enforcing that blockade. The result was the snapping of the line of
supply to the militants, and therefore a marked decrease in their
violence. The smaller vessels – Seaward Defence Boats, Landing
Crafts and Inshore Patrol Vessels rendered remarkable service
under trying conditions.
15. The ability of the Navy to sustain a large body of troops for such an
extended period attracted special attention in military circles, for it
added a qualitative edge to the overall defence capability.
16. The Navy saw action too. A squad from the Indian Marine Special
Force, along with commandos from the Army, denied the use of the
shallow lagoons to the LTTE. Lt Arvind Singh was awarded the
Maher Vir Chakra for his singular gallantry.
17. Combat landing on beaches, aerial surveillance, and support to the

troops by naval helicopters and aircraft are now standard
operations. The pilots of the ageing Alize Squadron displayed both
valor and versatility during Ops Pawan. As conditions in the Jaffana
Peninsula improved the refuges began to return and over 25,000 of
them were transported from Tamil Nadu to ports in Sri Lanka. Once
again, merchant ships were used extensively.
OPERATION CACTUS
18. The key role which the Indian Navy has come to play in the waters
of the region found vivid expression in Operation Cactus. The
mission of the Indian armed forces was to deal with the
mercenaries who sought to overthrow the democratically elected
Government of the Maldives on 03 November 1988.
19. Within hours of the cabinet decision to respond to President Abdul

Gayoom’s appeal for military assistance, a maritime
reconnaissance aircraft of the Navy was over the islands, while the
Army and the Air Force were in the process of inducting troops to
put down the attempted coup.
20. The landing of Indian troops that night forced the mercenaries to
adopt a new strategy. They commandeered a merchant vessel,
Progress Light, and taking with them a number of hostages,
including the Maldivian Transport Minister and his wife, they set sail
to Colombo. It was their intention to conduct negotiations in the
glare of international publicity in Sri Lanka, but President
Jaywardene would have none of it. A high-tension drama on the
ocean followed.
21. The Navy had diverted suitable ships to the islands and the
interception of Progress Light assumed paramount importance. The
merchant ship was spotted by a maritime reconnaissance aircraft
on the morning of 04 November, whereupon IN ships godavari and
Betwa sped to the scene to bring the rebels to book.
22. It was a thorny mission, as the name implies. The safety of the
hostages had to be the foremost consideration at all times. A
negotiating team sent by the Maldivian Government was embarked
on Godavari, but it failed to work out an acceptable solution.
23. The personnel of Godavari then took over, when psychological

pressure did not succeed, warning shots were fired by both the
naval ships. The graduated use of force finally compelled the rebels
to surrender on 06 November 1988.
24. The injured hostages were transferred to a hospital in Trivandrum

and the mercenaries were taken into custody aboard the Indian
Ships. Godavari and Betwa sailed into Male anchorage to a
tumultuous welcome two days later. The miscreants were handed
over to the appropriate authorities.
UN PEACEKEEPING
25. A Task Force comprising IN Guided Missile Corvette, LST and

Tanker was immediately deployed off Somalia once the US led
coalition force launched ‘Operation Restore Hope’ in Dec 92. This
joint operation of the Indian Armed Forces as part of UN
peacekeeping mission in the civil war ravaged Somalia continued to
be backed up by one IN warship on constant surveilliance and
patrol task off the Somalia coast along with the warships of
multinational forces till Oct 93. The IN thus spent a total of 347 ship
days maintaining vigil along the Somali coast and ports during
1992-93.
26. The IN was specifically tasked to support the de-induction of the

Indian Army contingent from Somalia in Dec 94. Consequently, an
In Task Force comprising two Guided Missile Frigates and a Tanker
with their organic air elements successfully de-inducted the last of
the Indian troops from Kishmayu in Southern Somalia from 06-10
Dec 94 and later supported de-induction of the full Brigade from the
Somali capital of Mogadishu from 13-23 Dec 94. The Task Force
undertook aerial reconnaissance using ship borne helicopters,
provided fire cover with gun-mounted helicopters and remained in
close proximity of the Somali ports to provide Naval Gunfire
Support to the Army to meet any eventuality during the full de-
induction phase. It is noteworthy that despite the large scale
violence between the warring clans resulting in collateral casualties
of UN forces as well as the potential of trigger happy factions in all
sides; not a single shot had to be fired throughout the de-induction
period. This itself is an indicator of the respect and reputation the
Indian Armed Forces commanded in Somalia as well as the
professionalism demonstrated by the IN Task Force.
27. Deployment of Indian Armed Forces in Somalia clearly

demonstrated to the world India’s resolve and capability to backup
international commitments.
NATIONAL CADET CORPS
NAVAL WING
TRAINING SYLLABUS
INTRODUCTION
1. The institutional training syllabus is in two parts, namely common

and specialized. Common syllabus covers subjects common to
Naval JD/JW and SD/SW, where as specialized syllabus covers
subjects pertaining to only Navy.
2. In all, there are 300 periods that are covered over a period of two
years. 30% of the periods ie 90 periods deal with common subjects
and 70% ie 210 periods with specialized subjects.
3. Opportunities are to be seized to impart practical training in Boat

Pulling, Sailing, Wind Surfing and Kayaking to enhance the Cadet’s
skills in Waterman-ship by way of additional sports / adventure
activities periods.
4. The Naval Training Syllabus is common for Boys and Girls. It is

divided into two parts namely:
(a) General Training Syllabus.
(i) 30% of 360 periods both for Non-Technical and

Technical Units.
(ii) 28% of 360 periods for the Naval Wind Medical Unit.
(b) Naval Training Syllabus.
(i) Non Technical. 70% of total training periods.
(ii) Technical/Medical.
(aa) Specialized Subjects. 36% of the total training

periods.
(ab) Naval Technical Subjects. 34% of the total periods.
5. The Naval Technical Syllabus covers both electrical and

engineering subjects. The scope of the technical subjects is limited
to an overview of technologies in vogue in the Navy.
BLOCK SYLLABUS
JUNIOR DIVISION / JUNIOR WING NAVAL
COMMON SUBJECTS
Ser Subject 1st year 2nd year Total Periods
1 The NCC 2 1 3
2 National Integration 4 3 7
3 Drill 11 12 23
4 Weapon Training 8 8 16
5 Leadership 4 4 8
6 Civil Affairs 3 3 6
7 Social Service 4 4 8
8 health and Hygiene 3 4 7
9 Environment and Ecology 2 2 4
10 Self Defence 2 2 4
11 Adventure Training 2 2 4
Total 45 45 90
COMMON SUBJECTS
Ser Subject Periods

1st year 2nd year Total Periods
1 Naval Orientation and Service

Subjects 20 20 40
2 Seamanship 20 20 40
3 Naval Communication 9 5 14
4 Navigation 4 4 8
5 Winds, Tides & Currents 3 3 6
6 Ship and Boat Modeling 15 15 30
7 Fire Fighting & Damage control 3 3 6
8 Survival and Rescue 5 5 10
9 Anti Submarine Warfare (ASW)-
Introductory 5 6 11
10 Gunnery – Introductory 2 2 4
11 Swimming 7 8 15
12 Certificate Examination ‘A’
Revision/Preparation/
Practical training 13 13 26
Total 106 104 210

NAVAL OFFICERS RANK INSIGNIA

NAVAL SAILORS RANK INSIGNIA

Cadet Hand Book Panaji PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cadet Hand Book Panaji PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cadet Hand Book Panaji PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CADET’S HANDBOOK

FOR JD/JW NAVAL WING NCC CADETS

************* NCC logo

1 GOA NU NCC, PANAJI

4. It would give me extreme happiness if this book is referred to time

5. I would like to convey heartfelt gratitude to Gp Cdr. Gp HQ

1. It gives me immense pleasure in releasing this Handbook for the

3. I take this opportunity to congratulate all personnel, who have

4. This Handbook is not the end all of information. With rapid

M/S Ambika Offset

First Edition – May 2008

Sec Topic Page No

Chapter I – National Cadet Corps

1 Aims, Objectives and Organization of NCC 1

Chapter II – National Integration

1 Indian Culture and Its Heritage 7

Chapter III – Drill

1 General and Words of Command 31

Chapter IV – Weapon Training

1 Characteristics of a Rifle / Rifle Ammunition 44

1 Motivation, Discipline, Duties of a good 59

Chapter VI – Civil Affairs

1 Civil Defence Organization and its Duties 64

Chapter VII – Social Service

1 Weaker Sections of Our Society and Their 74

Chapter VIII – Health and Hygiene

1 Structure and Functioning of the Human 86

Chapter IX – Environment and Ecology

1 What is Environment? 100

Chapter X – Self Defence

1 Precautions and General Behavior of Boy 107

Chapter XI – Adventure Activities 112

Chapter XII – Naval Orientation

1 History of the Indian Navy 113

Chapter XIII – Seamanship

1 Rigging – Cordage & Wire Ropes, Rope 158

Chapter XIV – Naval Communication

1 Navigation – Purpose and Common 191

Chapter XVI – Winds, Tides & Curents 201

Chapter XVII – Ship and Boat Modeling

1 Principles of Ship Modeling 203

Chapter XVIII – Fire Fighting and Damage Control

1 Watertight and Gas tight Integrity 212

Chapter XIX – Suvival and Rescue

1 Modern Methods of Rescue and 222

Chapter XX – Anti Submarine Warrare

1 Elementary Theory of SONAR sets 231

Chapter XXI – Gunnery 238

Chapter XXII – Famous Naval Operations 241

Appendix ‘A’ – NCC Naval Wing Training Syllabus 246

Appendix ‘P’ – Naval Officers and Sailors Rank 248

5 NCC functions under the Ministry of Defence. The Defence

6. The NCC is headed by an officer of the rank of Lieutenant General

8. The professors and teachers from colleges and schools are

9. Introduction. Based on the aims of NCC. The syllabus of NCC has

10. Training Activities. The training activities of NCC can be broadly

(a) Institutional Training Camps and Attachment Training.

(i) Camp Training. Each Cadet is expected to attent at least